JP6651264B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is configured to receive a game medium in which a game medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of obstacle nails implanted in the game area, and a game medium in the game area. (A general winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc.) are provided, and when a game medium is accepted into the receiving opening, a privilege (payout of the game medium, a variable winning opening, etc.) is given to the player. (E.g., occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage in opening and closing operations, etc.), and the player can be entertained.

  In addition, in the gaming machine, a lottery result (a normal lottery result, a normal lottery result, It has a variable winning opening (variable starting opening, large winning opening, special winning opening, V winning opening, etc.) that opens and closes according to the special lottery result, etc., and the timing when the variable winning opening opens according to the lottery result. Since it is necessary to perform a game medium driving operation so that the game medium reaches the variable winning opening, it is possible to impart difficulty to the game medium driving operation. By increasing the sense of accomplishment when the media is accepted, the player can be entertained.

By the way, some beginners and players who are unfamiliar with the hitting operation, etc., are unable to successfully accept the game medium in the variable winning opening of this type of gaming machine, making it impossible to enjoy the game and reducing the interest, There is a risk that the game will be stopped. On the other hand, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a passage for guiding a game medium from a predetermined position in a gaming area to a variable winning opening (Patent Document 1) .

However, in the technique as disclosed in Patent Document 1, if a game medium is spilled, there is a possibility that a game ball may be interposed between the outer frame and the main body frame.

JP 2012-239488 A

In view of the above circumstances, the present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to reduce the possibility that a game ball is sandwiched between an outer frame and a main body frame. I do.

Means 1: In a gaming machine,
"A gaming machine including an outer frame and a main body frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, wherein a game is played using a game medium,
The outer frame is
A lower member that is provided at a lower portion and includes a curtain plate on which the main body frame is placed in a state where the main body frame is closed with respect to an outer frame;
A hinge member provided on the left side of the outer frame and supporting the main body frame so as to be openable and closable,
At least
A first standing wall portion that is provided horizontally at a position retracted rearward from a front end of the outer frame on a side where the hinge member is provided ;
A second standing wall portion which is provided on the upper side of the curtain plate at a position on the right side and the front side of the first standing wall portion so as to prevent foreign matter from entering from the front of the gaming machine;
A game ball discharge area formed before the first standing wall portion and behind the front end of the outer frame, and for discharging game balls to the rear side of the curtain ;
With
The upper end of the first standing wall portion is higher than the upper end of the second standing wall portion ,
The game ball discharge area is formed with a width smaller than a lateral width of the hinge member,
The first standing wall portion is capable of receiving a game ball rolling rearward on the hinge member in a state where the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame, and is in contact with the first standing wall portion. While being configured to be able to guide the game ball to the game ball discharge area,
The first standing wall portion, wherein the body frame is positioned towards after Ri by said body frame lower end rear of closing "is intended.

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame and the main body frame .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. . (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state which removed the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. FIG. 5 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the upper hinge member is attached to the main body side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. 2A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1, and FIG. 2B is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened together with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in FIG. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the main frame is opened with respect to the outer frame by providing a guide blade at a portion of the lower hinge member on the outer frame side, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the outer frame in the embodiment of (a). It is an explanatory view showing the state where the main part frame was closed, and (c) shows the state where the main part frame was opened to the outer frame with the guide blade of an embodiment different from (a) and (b). It is explanatory drawing, (d) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the main body frame with respect to the outer frame in embodiment of (c). It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of the plate unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from above. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked at from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the attachment base unit of the effect operation unit and looked at from above. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit as viewed from below when disassembled. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from above. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit when disassembled and viewed from below. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the button unit of the effect operation unit and looked at from above. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit when viewed from below. It is a top view of a plate unit. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the effect operation unit in BB cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the production operation unit in CC cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the lower right effect unit of the plate unit, and (b) is a right side view of the lower right effect unit. (A) is a perspective view of the lower right door effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower right door effect unit as viewed from behind. It is DD sectional drawing in the door lower right effect unit of FIG. 43 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower right effect unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower right effect unit and looked from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotator inside unit of the door lower right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the rotating body internal unit from the disassembly. (A) is a front view of a state where the lower right rotator of the door of the lower right door effect unit faces forward, and (b) is a front view of a state where the lower right rotator of the door faces rearward. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit with the upper plate removing unit attached to the plate unit base, viewed from the front, and (b) of FIG. It is the perspective view seen. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at from the front by decomposing | disassembling an upper plate ball removal unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back plate removal unit from the disassembled view. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removing unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removing unit from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 4A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and FIG. 4B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the dispensing apparatus from the disassembly before. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the dispensing apparatus from back and disassembled. (A) is a front view of a payout apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in (a). (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is closed by the ball removal movable piece in the payout device, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is opened by the ball removal movable piece. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the payout blade in a payout apparatus. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball path unit in the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball path unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full ball path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit in the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower full tank path unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower full tank path unit from behind and disassembled. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the taxiway opening / closing door of a form different from FIG. 76 thru | or FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is the perspective view seen from the front which shows only a front component and a game panel in a game board. It is the perspective view seen from the back which shows only a front component and a game panel in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit of the game board from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the starting port unit of the front unit as viewed from the upper front, and (b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit as viewed from the lower rear. (A) is a perspective view of the side unit of the front unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the side unit viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the attacker unit of the front unit viewed from the upper front, (b) is a perspective view of the attacker unit viewed from the upper rear, and (c) is a perspective view of the attacker unit viewed from the lower rear. FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the center role of the front unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center role of a front unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structure and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structure and looked at from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper movable rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper movable rendering unit as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper movable production unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper movable effect unit and looked from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and disassembled the back upper decorative body unit of the back upper movable effect unit from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper decoration body unit of the back upper movable effect unit and looked from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back upper sub decoration body in a back upper movable decoration body unit. It is a front view which shows the state of an internal mechanism when the back upper decorative body unit of a back upper movable effect unit is in a retracted position. It is a front view which shows the state of an internal mechanism when the back upper decoration body unit of a back upper movable effect unit is in a 1st appearance position. It is a front view which shows the state of an internal mechanism when the back upper decoration body unit of a back upper movable effect unit is in a 2nd appearance position. (A) is a front view showing a part of the internal mechanism of the back upper movable effecting unit, (b) is a perspective view of a part of the internal mechanism different from (a), viewed from the front, and (c). FIG. 3B is a perspective view of FIG. It is an explanatory view showing movement of a part of an internal mechanism of a back upper movable production unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the main member which comprises the internal mechanism in a retreat position, (b) is a state in which the 1st transmission member rotates from a state of (a), and transmits to a 1st transmitted member. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which transmission of rotation of the rotation of the first rotation is started. (C) shows a state in which the first transmitted member is further rotated together with the first transmitting member from the state of FIG. 113 (b), and the upper back decoration unit is lowered from the retracted position to the first appearance position. It is an explanatory view, (d) is a state in which the first transmitted member further rotates together with the first transmitted member from the state of (c), transmission of rotation to the first transmitted member is completed, and the back upper decorative body unit is in the fourth state. It is an explanatory view showing the state where it reached one appearance position. (E) is a state in which the second transmission member of the transmission mechanism that has been rotated together with the first transmission member from the state of FIG. 114 (d) is further rotated to start transmitting the rotation to the second transmitted member. (F), the second transmitted member rotates together with the second transmitting member from the state of (e), and the back upper decoration unit descends from the first appearance position to the second appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which rotates while rotating. (G) shows a state in which the second transmitted member rotates together with the second transmitting member from the state of (f) of FIG. 115, and the back upper decorative body unit rotates while further descending toward the second appearance position. It is an explanatory view showing, (h) from the state of (g), the second transmitted member and the second transmitted member further rotate, the transmission of the rotation to the second transmitted member ends, and the back upper decorative body unit is moved. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which reached | attained the 2nd appearance position by making a half turn while descending from the state of a 1st appearance position. (A) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the rear. (A) is an explanatory view showing a front lower back front decorative body and a rear lower front second decorative body of a rear lower front movable effect unit from the front in a normal retracted position, and (b) is a front lower back front decorative body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the back lower front 1st decorative body and the back lower front second decorative body of a movable production unit from the front in the state of an appearance position. (A) is a perspective view of the back right movable rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back right movable rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the rear. (A) is a front view of the back-right movable decoration unit showing the first decoration surface of the back-right rotating decorative body facing the front, and (b) opens the shutter of the back-right rotating decorative body in (a). It is a front view of the back right movable production unit shown in the state where it was set, (c) is a front view of the back right movable production unit which shows the second decoration surface of the back right rotary decoration body facing the front, and (d) () Is a front view of the back right movable effect unit showing the third decoration surface of the back right rotary decoration body facing the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back left movable rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back left movable rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the rear. (A) is a front view of the back left movable decorative unit showing the first decoration surface of the back left rotating decorative body facing the front, and (b) is a front view of the second decorative surface of the back left rotating decorative body. It is a front view of the back left movable production unit shown in a state where it is turned, (c) is a front view of the back left movable production unit showing the third decoration surface of the back left rotating decorative body facing the front, ( (d) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit, showing a state in which the back left projecting decorative body of the back left rotating decorative body is in the appearance position in the state of (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in FIG. 122 (a). FIG. 7A is a perspective view of the movable effect unit behind the back of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 7B is a perspective view of the movable effect unit behind the back of the back unit as viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the raising / lowering unit of a movable production unit after a back, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering unit of a movable effecting unit after back, and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the raising / lowering unit at the time of the back decoration lower rotation decoration unit being a lower end position from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the raising / lowering unit at the time of a back decoration rotary decoration unit being a raising end position from the front. (A) is a front view of a back lower movable effect unit, (b) is a perspective view of the back lower back rotating decorative body unit of the lower back movable effect unit, and (c) is a lower back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back rotation decoration body unit from the back under the back movable production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotary decoration body unit after back back and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary decoration body unit after back and looked down from behind. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line in FIG. 129 (a). (A) is a front view showing a state in which the back-and-bottom rotating decoration body of the back-and-back bottom rotation decoration unit stops rotating, and (b) is a counterclockwise direction in which the back-and-back bottom rotating decoration body is viewed from the front. It is a front view which shows the state which is rotating, (c) is a front view which shows the state just before a back decoration is opened and it rotates just clockwise in front view, (d) is a back view. It is a front view showing the state where the back rotation ornament is rotating clockwise in the front view. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the drive mechanism which concerns on a lower back rear rotation drive motor in a back lower rotation decoration body unit, (b) is a differential mechanism which concerns on a rotation damper in a lower back rear decoration body unit. FIG. 4C is an explanatory view showing the configuration of (a), (c) shows a configuration of a coupling mechanism that couples a drive mechanism related to a back-bottom rear rotation drive motor and a differential mechanism related to a rotary damper in the back-bottom rear rotation decorative body unit. FIG. (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the connection mechanism when the back decoration is closed and the rotation is stopped, and (b) is a case where the back decoration rotates in the counterclockwise direction. It is an explanatory view showing a state of a connection mechanism at the time of. (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the coupling mechanism when the rotating decorative body is closed and rotation is stopped after the back, and (b) is a diagram in which the coupling ring of the drive mechanism rotates in the clockwise direction and the reverse. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the connection mechanism when a lower back rotary decoration is opening, (c) is the connection ring of a drive mechanism further rotating clockwise, and a back lower rotary decoration is completely completed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the connection mechanism at the time of opening, (d) of the connection mechanism at the time of the clockwise direction rotating with the connection mechanism of a drive mechanism with the back back decoration of an open state. It is explanatory drawing which shows a state. It is the perspective view which looked at the back four corner movable production unit of the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back four corner movable production unit of the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back four corner 1st unit in a back four corner movable production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back four corner 1st unit in a back four corner movable production unit, and was seen from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back four corner second unit in the back four corner movable effect unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back four corner 2nd unit in the back four corner movable production unit, and was seen from behind. (A) is a front view of the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable effect unit in the state of the normal retreat position, and (b) is the back four corner first unit in the state where the back four corner first decorative body appears. It is a front view of a unit, (c) is a front view of the back four corners first unit in the state of the back four corners second decoration object in an appearance position. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism at the time of a back four corner first decoration body in an evacuation position in a back four corner first unit, and (b) is a back four corner first unit in a back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism in the middle of a decoration body going from an evacuation position to an appearance position from a left side surface, (c) is a drive mechanism when the back four corners first decoration body is in an appearance position in a back four corners first unit. It is an explanatory view showing the state from the left side. (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the drive mechanism when the back four corner second decorative body is in the retracted position in the back four corner first unit from the left side, and (b) is a back four corner second unit in the back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism in the middle of a decoration body going to an appearance position from an evacuation position from a left side surface, (c) is a drive mechanism at the time of a back four corner first decoration body in a back four corner first unit in an appearance position. It is an explanatory view showing the state from the left side. It is a front view of the game board which shows the movement of the front movable decoration body of the front movable effect unit in the center role. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of the back upper decorative body of the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit at the first appearance position. The state in which the back upper decorative body of the back upper movable production unit in the back unit is in the second appearance position, and the lower back front first decorative body and the lower back front second decorative body of the back lower front movable effect unit are in the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows. A pair of shutters are opened with the first decorative surface of the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable rendering unit in the back unit facing forward, and the first decoration of the back left rotating decorative body of the back left movable rendering unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of the appearance position where the back left protruding decorative body appeared with the surface facing forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back right rotary decorative body of the back right movable rendering unit and the back left rotary decorative body of the back left movable rendering unit in the back unit, with the respective second decorative surfaces facing forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back right rotation decorative body of the back right movable rendering unit and the back left rotary decorative body of the back left movable rendering unit in the back unit with the respective third decorative surfaces facing forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the back decoration under the back of the back lower movable effect unit in the back unit is rotated counterclockwise in front view at the rising end position. The back decoration of the back-side movable production unit in the back unit is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view at the rising end position, and the back four corner second decoration bodies of the back four-corner movable production unit are in the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board showing a state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back four corner first decorations of the back four corner movable production unit in the back unit in the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which cut | disconnected the front structural member and the front unit at the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a right portion in the game area in FIG. 155, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH in (a) and showing only a main part, (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in (a) and showing only the main part, and (d) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in (a) and showing only the main part. . FIG. 155 is an explanatory diagram showing, in an enlarged manner, the vicinity of the upper winning award in FIG. 155.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 9 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled device viewed from behind.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable and is mounted on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is connected to lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30. The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are openably and closably mounted by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular outer shape in a front view and having a through-hole 111 penetrating front and rear, and a game mounted on a lower front part of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing spheres, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front part of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the left front part of the door frame base unit 100 A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the right front part of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball attached to the lower right part of the front face of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201. Handle unit 500 operable by a player to drive the player into the game area of the game board 5, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. A foul cover unit 520 that receives a game ball that has been hit into the game area and is ejected to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and a game ball that is mounted on the lower portion of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and has an upper plate 201 A ball feed unit 540 for sending the ball to the ball launching device 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 to close the through-hole 111, and a security cover 580 covering a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided. ing.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main frame base 600, which is partially insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. The upper hinge member 60 and the lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 are rotatably attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, respectively, and the upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are rotatable. The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably mounted, the reinforcing frame 660 mounted on the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the main body frame base 600 And a ball launcher 680 for driving game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and a frame 2 and a body frame 4 mounted on the right side of the body frame base when viewed from the front. , And door A locking unit 700 for locking between the main frame 3 and the main frame 4; and an inverted L-shaped payout which is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view and pays out game balls to the player side. The unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and the back of the game board 5 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main frame base 600. And a back cover 980.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends left and right which is open upward. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and a game ball in the ball tank 802 which is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left in a front view. A left and right tank rail 803 for guiding, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 in front view for guiding game balls from the tank rail 803 in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820 Game balls that are detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 at the lower side and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 A payout device 830 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from a payout control board accommodated in a payout control board box 950, and a game ball that is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and that is paid out by the payout device 830, is guided downward. The upper full tank path unit 850 for discharging the game balls from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200 and the payout unit base 801 A normal taxiway that is attached to the lower end and guides game balls released from the normal discharge port of the upper full-ball path unit 850 to the front and guides the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 and discharges from the full discharge port. A lower full tank path unit having a full tank guide path for guiding the game balls forward and guiding the game balls forward from the front end to the full tank receiver 530 of the door frame 3. Is provided with a door 860, a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a bass speaker mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view. Speaker unit 920, a power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side in front view of the rear side of the board unit base 910, and a power supply board is housed therein, and an interface control mounted on the back side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which a board is accommodated, and a payout control board box which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and in which a payout control board for controlling payout of game balls is accommodated. 950.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides an outer periphery of a game area 5a into which the game ball is to be shot and places the game ball fired from the ball firing device 680 on the upper part of the game area 5a as shown in FIGS. Front member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding to the front, a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front member 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a; A box-shaped substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower portion on the rear side and opened upward, and a main control substrate attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. Table having a main control unit 1300 and a plurality of winning ports which are mounted in the game area 5a in front of the game panel 1100 and can receive game balls hit into the game area 5a. A knit (not shown) and a back unit (not shown) having a liquid crystal display device attached to the back of the game panel 1100 above the board box 1200 and visible from the player side through the game panel 1100. Have.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launching device 680 plays the game with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are received in a winning port (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning ports. . Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the players can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is a front view of an outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front by exploding. 15A is a perspective view of a portion of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 15B is an exploded perspective view showing the exploded view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated from each other and extends left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. , And a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that extend to the right. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Also, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left and right direction are the same. Have been.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion side of the upper frame member 10 in a front view, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be openably and closably mounted.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 having both ends attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position closer to the left from the left and right center, A right sliding member 82 in the form of a flat plate attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, or the like), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. The connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 includes an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. , Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, or the like) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch 11 which penetrates vertically and is depressed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. Inside the engagement notch 11, an upper left and right fixing portion 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached. In addition, the upper frame member 10 includes, on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in front view, a mounting step portion 12 that is recessed from the general surface. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, or the like) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths are different. Is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes engagement notches 21 that penetrate vertically and are depressed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch 21, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of a lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and a lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D of the connecting member 85 described below are attached.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 has a front end notch portion 22 that is recessed rearward from the front surface at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same size as the front-rear width of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 20 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetric shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are depressed inward on the side surface outside in the left-right direction from the position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction and near the rear end. It has recesses 31 and 41 and projections 32 and 42 which bulge out from the side surface opposite to the recesses 31 and 41 and have an internal cavity. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the protruding portions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 described later are inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on the surface. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility such as a game hall or transported by the plurality of grooves, the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by fingers and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is opened. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape large enough to allow a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51, A standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and a front wall bulging forward from near the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go rearward as it goes toward.

  The curtain plate member 50 is provided with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 when assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 when assembled to the outer frame. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 (see FIG. 18 and the like).

  The upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined such that the front end side is lower. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 3 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via a left sliding member 81 and a right sliding member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-shaped decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a lattice shape, thereby increasing strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be housed inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown, the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like upper fixing portion 61 having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A front extending portion 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the right and left center of the front extending portion 62 from the right end of the front extending portion 62 to the front, and vertically penetrating, and an upper fixing portion 61 in plan view. A horizontal fixing portion 64 having a flat plate shape extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the edge extending from the left end to the front end of the front extension portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open. And a flat portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 15B).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). I have. The front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. The horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state where the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted into the concave portion 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 allows the main frame 4 to cooperate with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 15, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped lock body 66 a having a predetermined width on the left and right and extending back and forth, and an operation unit protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a and then extending diagonally left forward, and a mounting hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66d. The lock member 66 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is mounted at a position behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. In a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion of the hanging portion 65 of the 60 extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 17).

  The distal end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 17). In this state, a space is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a, in which a main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 described later can be accommodated.

  By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 Can be in a state of being all over. Thus, the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper main frame can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown, the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands up from a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71, which is located behind the center in the front-rear direction. An upright flat rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a size that penetrates the horizontal portion 71 vertically so that only one game ball can pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated conical shape in which the upper end is narrower at the upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position near the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and to extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 in an inverted U-shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71 is provided. Are fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 in front of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main frame lower hinge hole (not shown) of the main frame 4 at the main frame 4. In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge holes 74 coincide with the left discharge holes 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the rolling is performed to the rear side with a large interval, and it is possible to discharge from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge holes 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game balls from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the position of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connection member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connection member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connection member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C connecting the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. 86, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided to be separated from each other in the front and rear directions. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of contacting the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper and lower fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notches 11 of the upper frame member 10, and are fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. The lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front sides of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 protrusions 32 and 42. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is screwed into the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 projecting portions 32, 42 and screwed from the outer side surface. It is fixed to the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is lower than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion projecting rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. The upper and lower fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40. Furthermore, the lower left and right fixing members 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end surfaces of the lower frame member 20. .

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lock mechanism of the main frame 4 to the main frame side upper hinge member 620 by the lock member 66 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. It will be described with reference to FIG. 16A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state where the upper hinge member of the main frame is removed from the upper hinge member of the outer frame of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member was attached to the upper hinge member. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the lock member on the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the distal end of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a U-shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame side of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 according to the present embodiment includes the front end of the lock body 66a in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. Of the lock body 66a (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65). In the normal bearing state (not shown), the center of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the center of the front end face of the lock main body 63 are displaced obliquely and opposed. It is in a state.

  In this normal pivoting state, since the hinge pin 622 on the body frame that supports the heavy body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin on the body frame is There is almost no load on the front end face of the lock member 66a from 622. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end face of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operation part 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly. I have. In the figure, the center of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame is pulled out along the inclination of the U-shaped bearing groove 63 and comes into contact with the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock body 66a, the acting force is applied. F, a component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame and the front end face of the arc shape; And the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the one side inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (the mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment for rotating the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging part 65 does not work, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame moves the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and one of the bearing grooves 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  Therefore, even when the lock member 66 is subjected to the normal pin support state or the action force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. This prevents the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and prevents the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from dropping out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move rightward, the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts the hanging portion 65 and Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  In addition, even if the shape of the front end face of the lock body 66a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the above-described component force F1 or the front end of the lock member 66 is directed outward of the front protruding portion 62. By positioning the rotation center (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) of the lock member 66 at a position where the rotational moment to be rotated is generated, a load is not always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, and the lock is not performed. Even if the member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a is opposed to the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock body 66a, which has closed the bearing groove 63, retreats and the bearing groove 63 is opened, so that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is biased by the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves rightward, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. Thus, the upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame is accommodated in a space on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked).

  When removing the upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. Thus, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball bite prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a ball security for preventing a game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1. The mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 18A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1, and FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened together with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in FIG. FIG. 19A is an explanatory view showing a state in which a guide frame is provided at a portion of the lower hinge member on the outer frame side and the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the main body frame with respect to the frame, (c) is the state which provided the guide blade of embodiment different from (a) and (b), and opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame. (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame in the embodiment of (c).

  In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to a left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in a front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (the pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear. In addition, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when an invalid tool that has contacted the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the return portion 55 causes the tip of the invalid tool to be bent. Can be further folded forward, so that an unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

  By the way, when the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. When the game ball falls on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71) in the state of being, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is discharged backward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. Therefore, there is a possibility that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 through which game balls can pass and a right discharge hole 52. , And the left discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is caught between them.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and the outer frame 2 is not closed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and fraudulent acts using the gap.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above configuration, when the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls dropped on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 are discharged from the discharge holes 74 and the like. As shown in FIG. 19, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 may be provided with guide blades 95 and 96 for guiding game balls to the discharge holes 74 and the like, as shown in FIG.

  More specifically, the guide blade 95 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B has a distal end projecting outward from the main body frame 4, and has a base end located below the rear end of the left side surface of the main body frame 4. It is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis that extends vertically on the side, and is formed in a rod shape. The guide blade 95 is urged by a spring (not shown) to rotate counterclockwise in plan view. Then, as shown in FIG. 19A, the guide blade 95 has its tip inclined slightly rearward from a right angle to the left side surface of the main body frame 4 in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. The rotation end in the counterclockwise direction is regulated so as to protrude from the end. Therefore, from this state, the guide blade 95 can rotate so that the leading end side moves backward by resisting the urging force of the spring.

  When the main body frame 4 is rotated in the closing direction from the state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the tip of the guide blade 95 contacts the right side surface of the rising portion 72 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. The guide vane 95 rotates in the direction in which the tip moves rearward (clockwise in plan view) around the base end against the urging force of a spring (not shown). When the body frame 4 is further rotated in the closing direction, the guide blade 95 is further rotated to a state in which the guide blade 95 projects rearward from the body frame 4, and the guide blade 95 does not interfere with the outer frame 2. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be closed (see FIG. 19B).

  When the game ball falls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 70 when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the guide blade 95 projects obliquely left rearward from the rear end of the main frame 4. Therefore, the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be moved to the right side by the left side surface of the main body frame 4 and the guide vanes 95, and the game balls are moved to the rear side of the main body frame 4. The rolling can be suppressed, and the game ball can be guided to the discharge hole 74 by moving the game ball to the right side, so that the game ball can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a game ball from being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  When the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the guide blade 95 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view to the position shown in FIG. . Therefore, the guide blade 95 of the present embodiment rotates (moves) in accordance with the opening and closing operation of the main body frame 4.

  On the other hand, the guide blade 96 shown in FIGS. 19C and 19D has both ends attached to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 as shown, and opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. When the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the fan-shaped bellows shape is formed so that when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the fan-shaped bellows is formed. The guide blade 96 is movable in accordance with the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 4, similarly to the guide blade 95 described above.

  When the game ball falls onto the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 while the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the guide blade 96 is developed between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. The falling game balls can be rolled and guided to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by the guide vanes 96 that are present, and can be guided from the discharge holes 74 and the right discharge holes 53 opened on the rear side of the main body frame 4. The game ball can be discharged downward. Therefore, the guiding wings 96 can also prevent a game ball from being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  According to the present embodiment, since the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 can be guided to the discharge holes 74 by the guide blades 95 and 96, the game balls can be discharged from the discharge holes 74 without increasing the size of the discharge holes 74. It is possible to prevent the strength of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 from being reduced due to an increase in the size of the hole (discharge hole 74) penetrating the horizontal portion 71. Therefore, even if a tool for performing wrongdoing is inserted between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has a sufficient strength, so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is hardly distorted, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, and it is possible to prevent fraud.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 20 is a front view of a door frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 21 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a square external shape when viewed from the front, a plate unit 200 attached to a lower front part of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to an upper front part of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 350, a left side unit 400 attached to the left front part of the door frame base unit 100, a right side unit 450 attached to the right front part of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower right part of the front face of the door frame base unit 100. And a handle unit 500 which is attached through the dish unit 200.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a foul cover unit 520 mounted on a lower portion of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, a ball feed unit 540 mounted on a lower portion of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that closes the through hole 111 and a security cover 580 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a vertically long rectangular shape and having a through hole 111 penetrating front and rear, A tubular handle mounting member 120 mounted on the front lower right corner of the front of the door frame base 110 for mounting the handle unit 500, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 And a door frame side attached to upper and lower ends on the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 in a front view and protruding forward and rotatably attached to the main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. An upper hinge member 140, a door frame side lower hinge member 150, and a glass rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably mounting the glass unit 560. The unit mounting member 160, and a.

  As will be described later in detail, the plate units 200 of the door frame 3 are arranged vertically and swelled forward, and upper plates 201 and lower plates 202 capable of storing game balls, and upper plates 201 and lower plates 202. , A plate-shaped plate unit base 210 attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100 and a plate liquid crystal display device 244 attached to the plate unit base 210 in front of the plate 201 and capable of displaying images. An effect operation unit 220 having a touch panel 246 and an upper plate effect button 257 that can be operated by the player, a plate unit cover 260 covering the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 from the front side, and a right side of the upper plate 201 in front view. A door lower right production unit 270 having a door lower right rotator 270A that is arranged and rotates according to the game state, and covers the door lower right production unit 270 from the front side. A transparent effect unit cover 300, an upper plate ball removing unit 310 for removing game balls stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, and a lower unit for removing game balls stored in the lower plate 202 downward. A lower plate ball removing unit 320, a ball rental operation unit 330 for operating a ball rental machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) disposed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, An upper plate top decoration member 340 attached to the upper portion of the plate unit base 210 and capable of luminous decoration is mainly provided.

  The top unit 350 of the door frame 3 includes, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, a unit base 360 partially attached along the upper side on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and a unit base 360 having a light-transmitting property. A top decoration member 370 having a light-transmitting property attached to the front left and right centers of the front and rear sides of the 360 and bulging forward, and a top speaker attached to the inside of the top decoration member 370 and outputting a high-range sound ( (Not shown), and a decorative board 380 on the door frame, which is attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and has a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface.

  The left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 410 attached along the left outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent left side decoration member 420 attached to the front surface of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the left end of the top decoration member 370 of the top unit 350; and a front door frame on the front side of the left side decoration member 420. 3 and a left speaker unit 430 having a left speaker (not shown) and a door frame mounted on the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on a front surface thereof. And a left decorative substrate 440.

  The right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 includes, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, a flat unit base 460 attached along the right outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front side of the base 460 and having an upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350; 3 and a right speaker unit 480 having a right speaker (not shown) mounted between the unit base 460 and the right side decorative member 470. And a door frame right decorative board (not shown) to which is attached.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is attached to the handle body 502 attached to the handle attachment member 120 of the door frame base unit 100, and is rotatably attached to the handle body 502. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by a player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and cooperates with the handle body 502 to rotatably support the handle lever 504. And Although not shown, the handle unit 500 is mounted in the handle body 502 and detects a rotation angle of the handle lever 504, and is mounted on the handle body 502 and can be operated by a player. It has a stop button and a contact detection sensor attached to the inside of the handle main body 502 and detecting contact between the player and the handle lever 504.

  The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is, as shown in FIGS. 25, 26, 55 to 57, etc., a shallow box-shaped unit body attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and opened on the front side. 522 and a flat lid member 524 attached to the front surface of the unit main body 522. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner in front view, and penetrates the normal guide path of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray supply port 210a of the tray unit 200. 526, a full-filled ball receiving port 528 that opens rearward on the right side of the through-ball passage 526 when viewed from the front and that can communicate with the full-filled guide path of the lower full-filled ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4; A furl that receives a game ball (foul ball) that opens upward on the right side of the ball receiving port 528 in a front view and that does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball firing device 680 of the main body frame 4. A ball receiving port 530 and a front opening at the lower right corner in a front view, which release the game balls received in the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530, and a plate unit 200. Includes a ball outlet 532 which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 210c, the.

  The ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to a box-shaped unit main body 542 that extends left and right and has an open rear side, and a rear side of the unit main body 542, as shown in FIGS. A unit cover 544 removably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side in a front view of the foul cover unit 520 in a box shape having an open front side; A ball entrance 546 into which the game balls stored in 201 enter, a ball ejection port 548 capable of releasing the game balls entering the ball entrance 546 and opening rearward, and a ball entrance A ball discharge port 550 is provided, which is capable of discharging game balls entering the 546 and is opened forward below the ball entrance 546. Although not shown, the ball feed unit 540 includes a ball feed solenoid for releasing the game balls entered from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball discharge port 548, and a game ball entered from the ball entrance 546. And a switching mechanism for switching between the ball discharge port 548 side and the ball discharge port 550 side.

  The glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front and rear sides of the unit frame 562 and the frame-shaped unit frame 562 larger than the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 as shown in FIGS. A pair of glass plates 564 for closing the inside of the cage unit frame 562.

[3-1. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from above. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit of the staging operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit as viewed from below.

  FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit as viewed from below. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the effect operation unit when disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit disassembled and viewed from below. 40 is a plan view of the plate unit, FIG. 41 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlargement of a portion of the rendering operation unit in the BB section in FIG. 40, and FIG. 42 is a rendering operation in the CC section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a unit.

  Further, FIG. 43 (a) is a front view of the lower right effect unit of the plate unit, FIG. 43 (b) is a right side view of the lower right effect unit, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is the perspective view seen from the back of the door lower right production unit. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of the lower right effect unit of FIG. 43 (b). FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body internal unit of the lower right door effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body internal unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 (a) is a front view of a state where the lower-right rotating body of the door of the lower-right door effect unit faces forward, and FIG. 50 (b) is a front view of a state where the lower-right rotating body of the door faces rearward.

  FIG. 51 (a) is a perspective view of the dish unit with the upper dish removing unit attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 51 (b) is a perspective view of the dish with the upper dish removing unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen from the back in the state. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the upper tray removing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the upper tray removing unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 54 (a) is a perspective view of the lower dish removing unit seen from the front, and FIG. 54 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the lower dish removing unit seen from the front.

  The plate unit 200 protrudes forward from the door frame base unit 100. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls to be paid out from the payout device 830 and driven into the game area 5a, and a game provided below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing spheres. The plate unit 200 has a flat plate unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and a plate unit base 210 mounted on the upper front of the plate unit base 210 and having a left side bulging forward from the center in the left and right direction. And a lower plate main body 214 attached to the lower center of the front surface of the plate unit base 210 at the left and right centers and greatly swelling forward to form the lower plate 202. .

  Further, the plate unit 200 covers the front and lower sides of the effect operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper plate main body 212 and the front surface of the plate unit base 210, and the upper and lower plate main body 212, the lower plate main body 214, and the effect operation unit. A plate unit cover 260 attached to the front of the plate unit base 210, a door lower right effect unit 270 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 220 and attached to the front right portion of the plate unit base 210, and a door lower right effect unit The effect unit cover 300 which covers the front side of the plate unit 270 and is attached to the front of the plate unit base 210, and the game balls which are attached so as to sandwich the plate unit base 210 from front and rear and are stored in the upper plate 201 of the upper plate body 212. And a lower portion of the lower plate main body 214 for extracting the upper plate into the lower plate 202. Mounted it includes a lower tray ball vent unit 320 for discharging the game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202 downward, the.

  Further, the plate unit 200 is mounted on the upper surface of the effect operation unit 220, and a ball rental operation unit 330 for operating a ball rental machine disposed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall; An upper plate top decoration member 340 that is mounted on the upper portion of the unit base 210 and can be illuminated and decorated, and is mounted on the left side of the front of the plate unit base 210 behind the plate unit cover 260 so that light can be emitted forward. The dish unit left decorative board 345 provided with a plurality of LEDs, and the rear side of the effect unit cover 300 and the lower right side of the effect unit 270, are attached to the front right side of the dish unit base 210 and are directed forward. A dish unit right decorative board 346 having a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light, and a dish unit base 210 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 A decorative board 233 before the upper plate, a decorative substrate 235 after the upper plate, an upper liquid crystal substrate 241, a vibrating device 242, a touch panel 246, an effect button decorative substrate 251, an effect button pressing sensor 258, a lower right relay board 281 to be described later, A dish unit left decorative board 345 and a dish unit relay board 347 that relays connection between the dish unit right decorative board 346 and a peripheral control board (not shown) of the game board 5 are provided.

[3-1a. Dish unit base]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the plate unit base 210 of the plate unit 200 extends to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit base 210 penetrates forward and backward near the upper left corner in a front view and extends rearward in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates forward and backward below the upper dish ball supply port 210a. A speaker slit 210b comprising a plurality of elongated holes extending upward and downward, a lower tray ball supply port 210c penetrating forward and rearward and extending rearward in a lower portion at the lower left and right center of the front view, and a lower tray An upper plate ball feed port 210d penetrating back and forth at the upper right side of the ball supply port 210c in front view and extending vertically and having an upper portion located at the right end of the upper plate body 212.

  Further, the dish unit base 210 has a square-shaped inner opening 210e that penetrates forward and backward on the left side in the front view of the upper saucer ball outlet 210d, and a receiving plate that projects forward from the lower side of the opening 210e in a plate shape. A piece 210f, an escape opening 210g that penetrates forward and backward at the upper right side of the upper counter ball sending port 210d, and a handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 that penetrates forward and backward at the lower right corner of the front view. Handle insertion opening 210h, a cylinder insertion opening 210i that penetrates the front and rear near the right corner in the front view and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a right front view right side of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply opening 210c. And a notch 210j which is cut out from the rear end toward the front on the side surface of.

[3-1b. Upper plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the upper plate main body 212 of the plate unit 200 is formed in a container shape which is larger on the left side than on the left and right center in front view and bulges forward, and is opened upward and rearward. ing. The upper plate main body 212 is open to the left and rear only on the right end side in front view, and includes a guide passage portion 212a through which game balls can flow. The upper plate body 212 is inclined such that the bottom surface is entirely lower at the right end. More specifically, when the upper plate main body 212 is attached to the plate unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is positioned from the lower side of the upper plate ball supply port 210a to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. Are inclined so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of. Thereby, the game balls discharged forward from the upper ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate main body 212, and the received game balls can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the feed port 210d.

  Further, the upper plate main body 212 includes a metal grounding member 212b extending from the left and right center to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the grounding metal 212b is electrically grounded (grounded), so that the static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed by contact with the game ball.

[3-1c. Lower plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the lower plate main body 214 of the plate unit 200 is formed in a trapezoidal shape in plan view having a longer rear end side with respect to a front end side, and is formed in a container shape having upper and rear portions opened. The lower plate main body 214 has a ball hole 214a vertically penetrating through the bottom surface and can be closed by the lower plate hole removing unit 320, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the ball hole 214a. are doing. The lower plate main body 214 can receive and store the game balls discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit base 210, and transfer the game balls from the ball hole 214a to below the plate unit 200. Can be discharged.

[3-1d. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the effect operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the plate unit base 210 and the upper plate main body 212 at the center in the right and left directions when viewed from the front, and is attached to the attachment base unit 220A. A touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C mounted on the mounting base unit 220A on the left side in a front view of the touch unit 220B, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the mounting base unit 220A. , A unit cover 224 attached to the attachment base unit 220A so as to cover the outer peripheries of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from above, and a decorative member 226 attached to the right end of the attachment base unit 220A in a front view.

  The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed at the center in the axial direction on the outer peripheral surface over the entire circumference. The damper 222 in the present embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can reduce the impact (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220 and the dish unit base 210 side by reducing the impact when the touch unit 220B is hit, and also describe the touch unit 220B described later. The transmission of the vibration by the vibrating device 242 to the mounting base unit 220 and the dish unit base 210 can be reduced.

[3-1d-1. Mounting base unit]
As shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, the mounting base unit 220A of the staging operation unit 220 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and has a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 that is open at the top. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 which is attached and has a rear end attached to the front end of the upper plate main body 212 and has an open upper portion capable of accommodating the touch unit 200B from above, and a horizontally long upper plate attached to the front end of the unit case 231. A front lens member 232, a front plate decorative plate 233 disposed between the front plate lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and having a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a unit cover for covering the front side of the front plate lens member 232. And a translucent upper plate front decoration member 234 attached to the 224.

  The mounting base unit 220A is mounted on the rear end of the unit case 231 and has a plurality of upper decorative boards 235 provided with a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward, and an upper side of the upper decorative board 235. And a translucent upper decorative member 236 attached to the unit cover 224 and mounted on the unit cover 224, and the upper decorative plate 235 sandwiched between the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the upper decorative member 236. A linear light-emitting lens member 237 capable of guiding the light to emit light linearly, a cylindrical button mounting member 238 mounted on the unit cover 224 on the right side in front view of the upper decorative member 236, and a button mounting member 238, which is provided so as to be slidable up and down by 238.

  The mounting base 230 includes a flat mounting-side receiving portion 230a that is inclined so as to become lower toward the front from a substantially center in the front and rear, and a two-sided, penetrating through the mounting-side receiving portion 230a. It has two through-holes 230b and a cylindrical tubular receiving portion 230c extending downward from the periphery of the through-hole 230b. The through hole 230b has a square inner periphery. The cylindrical receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramid cylindrical shape so as to be narrowed downward (see FIG. 42). More specifically, in the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, the front inner peripheral wall extends substantially perpendicular to the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a, and the rear inner peripheral wall is lower than the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a. It is inclined to extend forward as it goes. Further, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c extends so that the inner peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined such that the lower ends (tips) thereof are slightly closer to the vertical of the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a.

  The unit case 231 is open upward and can accommodate the touch unit 220B. The unit case 231 projects forward and backward from the vicinity of both left and right ends of the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a in a front-rear direction. A horizontal support pin 231b, a pair of front support pins 231c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a and projecting upward from the vicinity of the bottom end of the housing recess 231a. It has a central support projection 231d projecting upward, and two receiving projections 231e projecting in a pyramid shape so as to be narrowed from the lower side of the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a toward the lower side, and separated from each other left and right. .

  Further, the unit case 231 penetrates vertically in a circular shape on the left side as viewed from the front with respect to the accommodation recess 231a, and is disposed around an insertion hole 231f through which a lower portion of the button unit 220C is inserted, and an insertion hole 231f on the upper surface. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C, and a linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 that extends left and right on the rear outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the housing recess 231a and that are recessed downward from the upper end are arranged. Notch 231h.

  The accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 has a plan view shape formed by combining a rectangle extending left and right and a trapezoid protruding outward from both left and right sides of the rectangle. Further, in the housing recess 231a, the bottom surface of the rectangular portion is formed to be lower downward than the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion on both the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is formed slightly lower than the height (length in the axial direction) of the damper 222.

  The four lateral support pins 231b protrude upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion in the accommodation recess 231a, and are formed so as to be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222. Further, the lateral support pin 231b is provided with a truncated conical tapered portion 231i whose diameter decreases toward the upper end side on the upper end side (see FIG. 41). The horizontal support pin 231b has a distance from the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a to the middle of the tapered portion 231i equal to the length of the damper 222, and is formed to be longer than the entire damper 222. The pair of front support pins 231c can be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222, and are formed slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222.

  The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion in the housing recess 231a. The outer periphery of the receiving portion 231e is formed in the shape of a truncated cone having a quadrangular shape. The two receiving projections 231e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230b of the mounting base 230. The receiving protrusion 231e has a front outer peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and is inclined such that the rear outer wall goes forward with respect to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. And extending. In addition, the outer peripheral walls on both the left and right sides of the receiving protrusion 231e are inclined and extend so that the lower ends (tips) thereof are slightly closer to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving portion 231e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230. In the assembled state, the lower end of the projecting portion 231e is inserted into the through hole 230a of the mounting base 231 and a slight gap is formed between the projecting portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

  The front plate decorative member 234 has a front surface exposed to the outside when the plate unit 200 is assembled. The post-plate decoration board 235 includes a plurality of decoration LEDs 235a for light-emitting decoration of the post-plate decoration member 236, and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for light-emitting decoration of the linear light-emitting lens member 237. .

  The linear light-emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer on the left and right than the decoration member 236 after the dish, and a light receiving section 237a and a light receiving section 237a are arranged above the plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b of the decoration board 235 after the dish. And a plate-shaped linear light-emitting portion 237b that is continuously fitted into the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231. The linear light-emitting lens member 237 has the front surface of the linear light-emitting portion 237a forming a part of the inner peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a by fitting the linear light-emitting portion 237b into the notch 231h of the unit case 231. In the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light-emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside when the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light-emitting lens member 237 can receive light from the peripheral LED 235b at the light-receiving portion 237a, guide the light received by the light-receiving portion 237a to the linear light-emitting portion 237b, and generate light of the linear light-emitting portion 237b. The entire upper end can be illuminated (linearly).

  The upper countersunk button 239 is attached by a button attachment member 238 so as to be slidable up and down, and includes an extension piece 239a extending below the button attachment member 238. By pushing down the upper bowl removing button 239, the upper bowl removing unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper bowl 201 from the upper bowl 201 to the lower bowl 202 (pull out). )be able to.

  The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 inserted into the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c, respectively. Further, the outer peripheral surfaces of the two receiving protrusions 231e projecting below the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is mounted, and the mounting base 230 into which the lower end of the receiving protrusion 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the cylindrical receiving portion and the inner peripheral surface. Accordingly, when a force (shock) such that the unit case 231 moves downward from the touch unit 220B side is not immediately transmitted to the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The bottom surface of the concave portion 231a bends downward to some extent so that the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving protrusion 231e abuts on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, so that the force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when transmitting the force from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends, so that the bending can reduce the force to some extent and transmit the force to the mounting base 230.

  Further, the receiving portion 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface that are inclined with respect to a surface on which they are formed (a surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). As a result, a part of the force transmitted from the receiving portion 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c acts in a direction along the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a provided with the cylindrical receiving portion 230c. I do. Thereby, the force from the receiving portion 231e (unit case 231) side is dispersed, and it is possible to prevent a large force from acting on the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is less likely to be damaged. .

[3-1d-2. Touch unit]
As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the touch unit 220B of the staging operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 having an open upper side, an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 mounted in the lower case 240 from above, A pair of vibrating devices 242 arranged on both left and right sides of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240, and a pair of vibrating devices 242 and the upper plate of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 are covered and attached to the lower case 240 and , A shallow box-shaped base member 243 having an open top, an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 inserted into the base member 243 from above and capable of displaying an image controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241, and an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. A frame-like grounding metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate covering the outer periphery, and a transparent touch panel covering the grounding metal fitting 245 and the upper surface of the upper liquid crystal display device 244. And 246, and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 which is attached to the lower case 240, a through covering the base member 243 of the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from the upper side.

  In a state where the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 are assembled, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 on the rear end surface thereof. A water-proof sheet-like waterproof seal 248 that extends over the entire length of the left and right sides of the rear end face of the case 240 and the like and is attached to the rear end faces of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247. ing.

  The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the housing recess 213a of the unit case 231, and is formed so as to be housed in the housing recess 213a. The lower case 240 has a rectangular board mounting portion 240a extending to the left and right, a plate-shaped protrusion 240b protruding in a trapezoidal shape from each of the left and right sides of the board mounting portion 240a, and an outer diameter of the damper 222 for each of the protrusions 240b. A pair of damper mounting recesses 240c which penetrate vertically in the same inner shape and are partially open to the outside in the left-right direction and are formed to be spaced apart in the front-rear direction, and project from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. And a vibrating device mounting portion 240e that is disposed near the substrate mounting portion 240a between the pair of damper mounting concave portions 240c of the protruding portion 240b and to which the vibrating device 242 is mounted.

  The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 has a C-shape in plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C-shape. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided substantially at the center of the upper and lower portions of the damper mounting concave portion 240c and over the entire periphery of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting concave portion 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222.

  The vibration device 242 includes a small vibration drive motor 242a and a weight 242b whose center of gravity is eccentrically attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration drive motor 242a. The vibration device 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242b by the vibration drive motor 242a.

  The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a in which the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from above and formed in a shallow box shape, an extending portion 243b extending outward from both left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a, A screw hole 243c vertically penetrating at a position corresponding to the damper mounting concave portion 240c of the lower case 240 at a tip end of the extension portion 243b, and an upper side is formed with a large diameter counterbore, and is formed at a lower end side of the screw hole 243c. And a C-chamfered tapered portion 243d (see FIG. 41) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

  The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 can pass through the tip side of the tapered portion 231i of the lateral support pin 231b in the unit case 231, and the base end side (lower side) of the tapered portion 231i. It is formed in a size that cannot be passed.

  The touch panel 246 includes tempered glass that is strong against impact and is not easily broken, a transparent sensor sheet of a capacitance type provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover that covers the outer periphery of the tempered glass and the sensor sheet. ing.

  The touch unit 220B can mount the damper 222 by inserting the damper 222 from the open side of the C-shape into the damper mounting concave portions 240c provided on the left and right sides of the lower case 240, respectively. At this time, the flange portion 240d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper attachment recess 240c is inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222. Accordingly, the movement of the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c in the axial direction is restricted. When the damper 222 is attached to the damper attachment recess 240 c, the upper end of the damper 222 contacts the lower surface of the extension 243 b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is lower than the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Protrude.

  In the touch unit 220B, the excitation drive motors 242a of the pair of excitation devices 242 are sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of vibrating devices 242 can generate vibrations independently of each other.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B can visually recognize an image displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 through the touch panel 246 from above. Then, an image of a button or the like is displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and the button of the image can be operated by touching the touch panel 246 so that the player operates the button of the image.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B has the prevention water seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when a liquid such as a drink is spilled on the plate unit 200, the liquid is prevented from entering the touch unit 220B. Thus, the touch unit 220B can be prevented from being damaged by the intrusion of the liquid.

[3-1d-3. Button unit]
As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the button unit 220C of the staging operation unit 220 includes a cylindrical unit main body 250 attached to the button unit attaching portion 231g of the unit case 231 in the attaching base unit 220A, and a lower part of the unit main body 250. An effect button decorative board 251 provided on the side and having an LED on the upper surface, and a board cover 252 which covers the lower side of the effect button decorative board 251 and is attached to the lower side of the unit main body 250 are provided.

  The button unit 220 </ b> C includes a cylindrical button base 253 inserted into the unit main body 250 so as to be slidable from above to below, and a button base 253 disposed between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250 to attach the button base 253 upward. A biasing spring member 254, a light guide member 255 inserted into the button base 253 and capable of guiding light from the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 upward, and a plurality of minute members arranged above the light guide member 255. Sheet-like diffusion lens member 256 having a prism, a transparent upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffusion lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and is attached to the upper surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251. And an effect button press sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the lower end.

  The unit body 250 includes three attachment pieces 250a extending outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface and attached to the button unit attaching portion 231g, and a flange-shaped shelf 250b extending inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. And a pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

  The button base 253 includes a tubular lower tubular portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf 250b, a conical tubular upper tubular portion 253b whose diameter increases upward from the upper end of the lower tubular portion 253a, A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b and has a lower end that can penetrate through the through-hole 250c of the unit main body 250 and protrudes outward from the lower end to engage (abut) with the lower surface of the unit main body 250. And a pair of engaging claws 253c having an outer peripheral surface protruding radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylindrical portion 253b, which is shorter than the outer diameter of the upper end, and the lower end of which can contact the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit body 250. A plurality of flat contact pieces 253d, and a detection piece 253e extending outward from the outer peripheral surfaces of the lower cylindrical portion 253a and the upper cylindrical portion 253b in a flat shape and detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258 are provided. There.

  The spring member 254 is a coil spring as illustrated. The lower end of the spring member 254 is in contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit body 250, and the upper end is supported by a plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253.

  The light guide member 255 extends from the lower surface of the main body portion 255a to a position near the lower end of the lower cylindrical portion 253a of the button base 253 downwardly from the lower surface of the main body portion 255a. And a plurality of columnar light guides 255b. The plurality of light guides 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration board 251 and can guide the light from the LEDs and emit the light from the entire upper surface of the main body 255a.

  In the button unit 220C, the button base 253, the light guide member 255, the diffusion lens member 256, and the upper plate effect button body are integrally assembled, and they can slide up and down inside the unit body 250 together. it can. The button base 253 and the like have the upper surface of the upper plate effect button 257 project upward from the upper end of the unit main body 250 by the urging force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253c of the button base 253 are connected to the unit main body. By engaging with the lower surface of 250, further rise is restricted, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are in the state of being located at the rise end.

  When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button press sensor 258. The pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 contact the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit main body 250, and further lowering is restricted. , The upper plate effect button 257 and the like are located at the lower end.

  In addition, the button unit 220C can make the upper plate effect button 257 emit light by lighting the LED of the effect button decoration board 251. The LED of the effect button decoration board 251 is a full-color LED, and the upper plate effect button 257 can be illuminated in various colors.

[3-1d-4. Features of production operation unit]
As shown in FIG. 41, in the effect operation unit 220 of the present embodiment, the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper attachment recess 240 c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220 </ b> B is assembled from the lower surface of the lower case 240 in the assembled state. Also project downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. Further, the tip surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four lateral support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom surfaces of the counterbored portions of the screw holes 243c of the base member 243, and are located above the touch unit 220B with respect to the lateral support pins 231b. The movement is restricted by the flat washer on the head of the screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. Further, the tapered portion 231i formed on the upper end side of the lateral support pin 231b and the tapered portion 243d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42, the effect operation unit 220 is configured such that the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly lower than the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a on the side of the lateral support pin 231b. It protrudes upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower surface A gap is also formed between the case 240 and the lower surface. A gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A with the lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the left and right lateral support pins 231b.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 220 is narrowed downward in the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is mounted from above in the pyramid-shaped cylindrical receiving portion 230c which narrows downward in the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A. The lower end of the round pyramid-shaped receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. Accordingly, in the normal state, only the vicinity of the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the attachment base 230 while the inside of the unit case 231 (the center side of the accommodation recess 231a) is floating in the air.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 31 and the like, in the effect operation unit 220, the upper end of the linear light-emitting portion 237b of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is linear (along the rear side near the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B). It is exposed in the form of a band. The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is about ／ of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. The upper plate rear decoration member 236 is disposed behind the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. An upper plate ball removal button 239 is disposed on the right side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236 in a front view. Further, a button unit 220C is disposed on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front.

  The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player according to a game state that changes by hitting a game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, an image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 for entertaining.

  As an image displayed on the upper-panel liquid crystal display device 244, an image imitating operation buttons is displayed, and detection of a touch by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 can be received. The operation buttons can be operated, and an effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of the effect using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation buttons, and various images can be displayed.

  In the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the plurality of dampers 222 in a state of being floated from the unit case 231, the touch unit 220B is operated by operating the vibrating device 242 according to the game state. Can be vibrated. By vibrating the touch panel 246 (the touch unit 220B) with the vibration device 242 at the time of the production using the touch panel 246, the vibration by the vibration device 242 is applied to the finger or the hand of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246. By transmitting the information, the player can be surprised by the illusion that the player is operating a physical operation button despite operating the operation button of the image. Can be suppressed to make the game more enjoyable for the player.

  Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 220, since the button unit 220C is provided on the left side in the front view of the touch unit 220B, the player is caused to press the upper plate effect button 257 according to the playing state, and the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed. You can entertain the operation. To be more specific, the operation buttons of the image on the touch panel 246 dislike the actual operation buttons because they only touch the touch panel 246. Therefore, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 without giving a sense of incongruity to the operation of the upper plate effect button 257, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. .

  Since the effect operation unit 220 is arranged at the portion of the plate unit 200 that is bulging forward and provided with the upper plate 201, the game operation can be performed even when the effect is not performed using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. The user may hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the effect operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 so as to float from the lower unit case 231. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 is increased. The impact can be absorbed to some extent by the force. More specifically, when an impact (load) is applied from above due to the touch unit 220B being hit or the like, the touch unit 220B is transmitted to the damper 222 in which the left and right lateral support pins 231b are inserted, and the damper 222 is lowered while the touch unit 220B is lowered. Is compressed. The shock from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pins 231b.

  When the touch unit 220B further descends due to the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 contacts the upper end of the damper 222 in which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and is supported by the front support pin 231c as the touch unit 220B descends. The damper 222 is compressed downward. Accordingly, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c in addition to the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

  When the touch unit 220B further descends due to the impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B comes into contact with the bottom surfaces on the left and right sides of the housing recess 231a in the unit case 231 and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. Thus, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without passing through the plurality of dampers 222.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered, the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 is bent such that the center thereof moves downward by the load from the center support protrusion 231d. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. When the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is bent, the pair of receiving portions 231e projecting downward from below the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is lowered. Then, when the receiving portion 231e further descends due to the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving portion 231e contacts the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and The impact is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

  Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are formed in the shape of a pyramid that narrows downward, respectively, from the receiving portion 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c (toward the mounting base 230). The transmitted load is dispersed and transmitted in a direction along the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and in a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, since the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is arranged in multiple layers before the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is transmitted to the mounting base 230, the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230, and the like can be hardly damaged by the impact.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 220 includes a linear light emitting portion of a linear light emitting lens member 237 that extends along the rear outer edge of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the upper decoration board 235 according to the game state. The upper end of 237b can emit light linearly. Thereby, the player's interest can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, and the like are enjoyed, and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, according to the game state, the decoration LED 235a of the decoration plate 235 of the upper plate causes the decoration member 236 arranged on the rear side of the touch panel 220B (the rear side of the linear light emitting portion 237b) to emit light. be able to. By decorating the decorative member 236 after the upper plate with light emission, the player's interest is attracted to the staging operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B in the same manner as the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Thus, it is possible to entertain the effect presented by the effect operation unit 220 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the touch unit 220B provided with the upper liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is connected to the lower cover 262 of the lower unit cover 260 of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231. And a waterproof seal 248 is affixed to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. As a result, even when water (droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate main body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201 flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262). In addition, it is possible to prevent the dewed water from entering into the touch unit 220B, and to prevent a trouble from occurring in the touch unit 220B.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42, the post-upper decoration substrate 235 for emitting and decorating the upper-post decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201. It is not exposed to the water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, so that it is possible to prevent a problem such as a short circuit or corrosion from occurring in the decorative plate 235 after the upper plate.

[3-1e. Dish unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 27 to 30, the plate unit cover 260 of the plate unit 200 extends right and left, and the center of the right and left bulges forward, and is formed in a shell shape opened rearward. . The plate unit cover 260 is opened forward substantially at the center in the left and right directions, and a lower plate opening 261 whose rear end is closed by the plate unit base 210, and a top plate side (upper side) of the inner peripheral wall of the lower plate opening 261 And an upper plate lower covering portion 262 that covers the lower side of the upper plate main body 212 and the staging operation unit 220, and a bass sound of the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4 which is disposed on the left side of the lower plate opening 261 in a front view. A speaker grill 263 for transmitting sound from the speaker, a dish unit left decorative member 264 arranged above the speaker grill 263 and illuminated by the dish unit left decorative board 345, and arranged on the right side of the lower dish opening 261 in a front view. A handle opening 265 through which the rear portion of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes, and a bottom surface of the plate unit cover 260 are formed. A bottom plate portion 266 for covering the lower Rishitasara body 214, and a, a bottom plate opening 267 is closed by the lower tray ball vent unit 320 penetrates the bottom plate portion 266 on the upper and lower left and right of the center.

  The lower plate opening 261 is A bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall is closed by the lower plate main body 214. The speaker grill 263 and the dish unit left decorative member 264 are It is constituted by a punching metal having a plurality of holes formed in a metal plate.

  The plate unit cover 260 has a smooth surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and a rugged surface on the right side. In addition, the right side in the front view has substantially the whole translucency.

  When the plate unit cover 260 is assembled to the plate unit 200, a gap between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower cover portion 262 is formed so as to be gripped by one hand. Thus, when the player performs a touch operation on the touch unit 220B, the finger (hand or arm) to be touched can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261 and the touch operation of the touch unit 220B can be performed. Can be easily performed.

  More specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the upper surface of the front end of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the lower cover portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the upper surface of the rear end of the touch unit 220B and the lower cover portion 262 The thickness between the lower surface and the lower surface is about 50 mm, and the distance before and after the front end of the lower cover portion 262 from the rear end of the touch unit 220B is about 60 mm. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined by about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. This allows the player to grasp the space between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the lower cover 262 with the hand of the player.

[3-1f. Direction lower right door unit]
The lower right effect unit 270 of the plate unit 200 is disposed above the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the effect operation unit 200, as shown in FIGS. 43 to 50, and rotates according to the game state. It is provided with a spherical door 270A at the bottom right of the spherical door for luminous decoration. The lower right door effect unit 270 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 210 so as to close the escape opening 210g and rotatably supports the lower right door 270A, and is attached to the unit base 271. A lower right drive motor 272, a drive gear 273 fixed to the rotation shaft of the lower right drive motor 272, a driven gear 274 meshed with the drive gear 273 and attached to the lower right rotator 270 </ b>A; A shaft member 275 rotatably supporting the gear 274 and attached to the unit base 271.

  The lower right door effect unit 270 is attached to the driven gear 274 on the opposite side of the lower right rotator 270 </ b> A and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271. A base-side bearing member 277 rotatably supporting the opposite side of the rotating body 270A to the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271; and a rotation of the lower right door rotating body 270A attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 capable of detecting the position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side of the lower right rotator 270A when viewed from the front, and a decoration member 279 attached to the rear side of the unit base 271 and attached to the front. A door lower right base decorative board 280 provided with a plurality of LEDs, and a door lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271, It includes a detection sensor 278, a door lower right base decorative board 280, and a door lower right relay board 281 that relays connection between a door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 described later and a peripheral control board (not shown). .

  The lower right door rotating body 270A constitutes an outer shell, and is disposed between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, each of which is a hemispherical shell-shaped front outer shell member 285 and a rear outer shell member 286. A rotating body internal unit 290. The front shell member 285 and the rear shell member 286 are formed with semicircular cutouts 285a and 286a, respectively, about the rotation axis. The front outer shell member 285 has, on a translucent hemispherical shell-shaped surface, a band decoration 285b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction in a belt shape, and a heart shape arranged in the center of the band decoration 285b. Heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286b having a metallic luster and extending in a circumferential direction in a belt shape on a translucent hemispherical shell surface. When the front shell member 285 and the rear shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285b of the front shell member 285 and the band decoration 286b of the rear shell member 286 are connected to each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the rotator inner unit 290 includes a disc-shaped lower right rotator decoration board 291 provided with a plurality of LEDs on both surfaces, and a center of the lower right rotator decoration board 291. The first fixed shaft member 292 and the first fixed shaft member 292 which extend perpendicular to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 and whose tip is attached to the shaft member 275 are It is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291, and its tip is attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277. And the second fixed shaft member 293. Although not shown, a wiring cord for connecting the lower right relay board 281 and the lower right rotating body decorative board 291 is inserted into the second fixed shaft member 293.

  The rotating body inner unit 290 is disposed on both sides of the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 and is a flat, annular transparent reflector base 294 attached to the inside of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A first reflector 295 in the shape of a bosh that is attached to the reflector base 294 and is opened in an axially outward direction in an annular shape; A second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and can reflect light from the lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of radially extending flat ribs.

  The rotator inner unit 290 includes a door lower right rotator decoration substrate 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, and a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296. They are separated from each other for relative rotation.

  The unit base 271 has an annular ring portion 271a disposed on the rear side of the lower-right rotating body 270A of the door, and a flat plate shape forward from a portion obliquely upper right in front view with respect to the center of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a. Of the first protruding piece 271b, the second protruding piece 271c protruding forward from a portion of the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a opposite to the first protruding piece 271b, and the second protruding piece 271c. And a bearing groove 271d into which the front end of the second fixed shaft member 293 is recessed in a U-shape from the front end to the rear.

  The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first protruding piece 271b with the rotation shaft penetrating therethrough. The driven gear 274 has a larger diameter than the drive gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes a mounting portion 275a that is mounted on the front end of the first protruding piece 271b, and a cylindrical shaft portion 275b that protrudes from the mounting portion 275a in a cylindrical shape. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b, and can non-rotatably support the distal end of the first fixed shaft member 292 by the inner periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b.

  The rotator-side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat detection piece 276b extending outward. The base-side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second projecting piece 271c so as to close the open front end of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second projecting piece 271c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are attached to the second protruding piece 271c symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis of the lower right rotating body 270A of the door. The two rotation detection sensors 275 include a rotation position in which the heart decoration 285c of the lower right rotator 270A faces forward (see FIG. 50A) and a rotation position in which the heart decoration 285c faces rearward (FIG. 50B). ) Can be detected respectively.

  The lower right door effect unit 270 of the present embodiment can rotate the lower right door rotator 270A by the lower right door drive motor 272 according to the game state, and stops the heart decoration 285c to face forward. Whether or not the player has a chance can be suggested depending on whether or not the game is performed, and it is possible to prevent the player from having a good time and enjoyment.

  In addition, since the door lower right rotator decorative board 291 inside the door lower right rotator 270A is non-rotatably attached to the lower right door effect unit 270, the door lower right rotator 270A rotates while the door lower right rotator 270A rotates. When the lower rotator decoration board 291 (LED) emits light, the position of light emitted from the lower right rotator decoration board 291 moves as the lower right rotator 270A rotates, and the first reflector 295 and the second Since the direction of the light reflected and guided by the two reflectors 296 changes, the lower right rotator 270A of the door is illuminated as if the light were flashing without blinking the LED of the lower right rotator decoration board 291. By irradiating various colors of light from the LEDs, the rotator 270A at the lower right of the door can be illuminated and decorated in a rainbow color, and the player can be entertained.

[3-1 g. Production unit cover]
The effect unit cover 300 of the plate unit 200 includes, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, a hemispherical transparent rotating body cover part 301 that covers the front side of the spherical door lower right rotating body 270A in the lower right door effecting unit 270. A decorative portion 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body cover portion 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side of the plate unit cover 260 when viewed from the front, and a locking unit 700 penetrating back and forth on the lower right side of the rotating body cover portion 301. And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

  The effect unit cover 300 is in the shape of a container whose rear is open, and has translucency. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover part 301 is decorated with light emission by the door lower right base decorative board 280 of the lower right door effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover part 301 is the dish unit right decorative board 346. Decorated with light.

[3-1h. Unit for removing the upper plate ball]
As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the upper bowl removing unit 310 of the tray unit 200 is attached to the front of the tray unit base 210 so as to cover the opening 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the tray unit base 210 from the front side, and A cover 311 having an insertion opening 311a through which the extension piece 239a of the upper tray ball removal button 239 can be inserted, and a through-hole 210e of the tray unit base 210 in the cover 311. A front base member 312 mounted at the upper left position in a front view, a pressure transmitting member 313 rotatably supported by the front base member 312 and rotated by pressing the upper bowl button 239; And a first spring member 314 that urges the upper plate 313 in a direction in which the upper countersunk button 239 rises.

  In addition, the upper dish removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 so as to close the upper dish sending port 210d of the dish unit base 210 from the rear, and a rear base member. A slider 316 disposed between the base 315 and the plate unit base 210 and attached to the rear base member 315 so as to be able to move up and down and contacting the pressure transmitting member 313 from above; A second spring member 317 for urging the slider 316 upward.

  The front base member 312 extends in parallel with the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and has a flat base portion 312a attached to the cover 311. A pair of flat base portions 312a extending forward from both left and right sides of the base portion 312a. An extension piece 312b, a shaft support 312c recessed rearward from the front end of the extension piece 312b in a U-shape, and a rear end of the first spring member 314 provided near the lower end of the front surface of the base 312a. A hook-shaped spring engaging portion (not shown).

  The pressure transmitting member 313 has a horizontally long cylindrical shaft portion 313a whose both ends are rotatably inserted into the pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rearward extension extending rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape. An upwardly extending piece 313c extending upwardly from the vicinity of the left end in front view of the upper surface of the extending piece 313b and the rearwardly extending piece 313b, and to which the lower end of the extending piece 239c of the button 239 can be contacted. A downwardly extending piece 313d extending downward from the right end in front view of the lower surface of the rearwardly extending piece 313b in a plate shape; and a first spring projecting downward from below the vicinity of the left end in front view of the shaft portion 313a. And a hook-shaped spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downwardly extending piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape that extends downward as it goes rearward, and has a lower end that can contact the slider 316 that removes an upper dish.

  The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape in parallel with the rear surface of the plate unit base 210, and is provided with a base portion 315a attached to the plate unit base 210, and is separated from the front surface of the base portion 315a from side to side. A slider support portion 315b slidably supporting the left and right ends of the ball-sliding slider 316; and a front opening at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper plate ball sending port 210d of the plate unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a. An upper entrance 315c that opens downward on the rear side of the base 315a and through which game balls can flow.

  In addition, the rear base member 315 extends downward continuously with the upper entrance 315c behind the base portion 315a, is opened rearward, and has a lower end curved rearward. An L-shaped second guiding path 315e extending downward from the lower side of the one guiding path 315d, extending leftward in front view, opening the left end to the left, and entirely opening backward, and a second guiding path 315d. The base portion 315a is moved forward and backward so that two sides are surrounded by a flat-shaped passage cover 315f closing the rear end side of a portion of the guideway 315e extending to the left and an L-shaped second guideway 315e. It has a penetrating opening 315g, and a spring engaging portion 315h that projects forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and engages the upper end of the second spring member 317.

  The L-shaped second guiding path 315e of the rear base member 315 is inclined such that a portion extending to the left becomes lower toward the left. As shown in FIG. 51 (b), the left end of the second guide path 315e is inserted into a cutout portion 210j of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c of the dish unit base 210, and the second guide path 315e The lower dish ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

  The slider 316 has a slider base 316a having a flat plate shape and both left and right ends slidably supported by a slider support portion 315b of a rear base member 315, and a slider from the left to the front from the center in front view of the upper end of the slider base 316a. A transmission piece 316b which extends upward through the opening 210e of the unit base 210 to the upper side of the receiving piece 210f so that the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d of the pressure transmitting member 313 can contact the upper surface, and a slider below the transmission piece 316b. A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c projecting rearward from the rear side of the base 316a downward, and a hook-shaped spring engagement projecting from the front surface of the slider base 316a and locking the lower end of the second spring member 317. And a stop 316d.

  In the state where the dish unit 200 is assembled, the upper tray ball removing unit 310 has an upper entrance 315c of the rear base member 315 opened at the lower end on the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a of the upper dish main body 212 in front view. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be supplied from the upper entrance 315c to the ball feed unit 540 via the first guiding portion 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

  In addition, when the upper plate removing button 239 is pressed downward by the upper plate removing unit 310, the pressing transmitting member 313 resists the urging force of the first spring member 314 by the extended piece 239 a of the upper plate removing button 239. Then, the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d rotates around the shaft 313a in a direction in which the lower end moves downward. When the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d moves downward with the rotation of the pressure transmitting member 313, the downwardly extending piece 313d is in contact with the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d. The slider 316 slides downward against the urging force of the second spring member 317.

  When the upper bowl removing slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmitting unit 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feed unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feed unit 540, and the first guide path. The state where the 315d side communicates with the second guide path 315e side is established. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 are discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 210c to the lower plate 202 through the upper entrance 315c, the first guide path 315d, the ball feed unit 540, and the second guide path 315e. The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

  When the downward pressing of the upper ball removing button 239 is released, the upper ball removing slider 316 and the upper ball removing button 239 are raised by the urging force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317, It can return to the original state.

[3-1i. Lower plate ball removal unit]
As shown in FIG. 54 and the like, the lower plate ball removing unit 320 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower plate main body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the plate unit cover 260. A flat-plate-shaped lower-plate-ball-pulling base 321 having an opening 321a corresponding to the hole 214a, and a flat-plate-shaped slide lid 322 that can slide on the lower-plate-ball-pulling base 321 left and right to close the opening 321a. A knob 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed to the outside from the front of the plate unit cover 260; and a spring for urging the slide lid 322 in a direction to close the opening 321a by the slide lid 322. A member 324, a holding device 325 that holds the slide lid 322 at a position where the opening 321 a is opened against the urging force of the spring member 324, It is provided.

  The opening 321a of the lower bowl removing base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right from the left and right in the front view. By attaching the lower plate removing base 321 to the lower plate main body 212, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported between the lower plate removing base 321 and the lower plate main body 212 left and right. The slide lid 322 has a holding projection 322a held by the holding device 325 on the left end side in front view.

  The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower bowl removing base 321 and a pair of holding claws 325b projecting from the main body 325a so as to be openable and closable and capable of gripping the holding protrusion 322a. The holding device 325 inserts the holding protrusion 322a between the pair of opened holding claws 325a and presses it toward the main body 325a, thereby closing the pair of holding claws 325b to hold the holding protrusion 322a and holding the pair of holding protrusions 322a. The claw 325b is maintained in a closed state. In this state, when the holding projection 322a is moved toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325a are opened, and the holding of the holding projection 322a is released.

  When the knob 323 (sliding lid 322) is moved to the right in front view, the sliding lid 322 is located between the opening 321a and the drilling hole 214a of the lower pan body 214. The game balls in the lower plate 202 do not fall downward from the ball hole 214a, and the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 202.

  By operating the knob 323 to the left from this state, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game balls in the lower plate 202 pass through the ball hole 214a and the opening 321a and fall below the plate unit 200, so that the game balls in the lower plate 202 can be pulled out. At this time, since the holding projection 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even when the operation of the knob 323 is stopped, and the lower plate 202 You can keep pulling out the game balls inside.

  To close the slide cover 322, when the knob 323 is slightly operated to the left, the pair of holding claws 325b are opened to release the holding of the holding protrusions 322a, and the slide cover 322 is slid to the right by the urging force of the spring member 324. Then, the ball hole 214a is closed. As described above, by operating the knob 323 of the lower bowl removing unit 320, it is possible to cause the lower bowl 202 to store gaming balls or to remove the gaming balls stored in the lower bowl 202.

[3-1j. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball rental operation unit 330 of the plate unit 200 includes, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like, a unit case 331 which is attached to the upper surface near the right end in front view of the effect operation unit 220 and has translucency; A ball lending button 332 exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and operable by a player; a return button 333 exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the ball lending button 332 and operable by the player; A display section 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the return button 333.

  The ball lending operation unit 330 inserts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and presses a ball lending button 332 to place a predetermined number of game balls in a plate unit. The user can borrow (pay) the money into the upper plate 201 of the garbage store 200, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the remaining cash or the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the remainder of the borrowed money is returned. Further, the display unit 334 displays the number of cash or prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine, an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down, and the like.

[3-1k. Top plate top decorative member]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the upper plate top decorative member 340 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the left and right center at the upper end of the plate unit base 210 and has a translucent upper plate top lens extending in a left and right band shape. 340a, and an upper plate top decorative substrate 340b attached below the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface.

  The upper plate top decorative member 340 can cause the LED of the upper plate top decorative substrate 340b to emit light, thereby causing the upper plate top lens 340a to emit light in a band shape. Since the upper plate top decorative member 340 is arranged on the rear side of the effect operation unit 200, the upper plate top decorative member is similar to the light emitting decoration such as the upper plate rear decorative member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237. By illuminating the 340, the player's interest can be attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the effect presented by the effect operation unit 220 can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. be able to.

[3-1l. Characteristic effects of the dish unit]
The plate unit 200 of the present embodiment includes a touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 for storing game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a, and a game ball in the game area 5a. When displaying an image on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 in accordance with a game state that is changed by hitting, a band-like shape is formed along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the upper liquid crystal display device 244 near the game area 5a. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the upper plate decoration member 236, the upper plate top decoration member 340, and the like can emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (sight) Can be noticed by the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like entering from outside, and the line of sight (interest) of the player can be attracted to the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like, that is, the upper liquid crystal display device 244 side. Can. Therefore, when presenting an effect such as an image in accordance with a game state, the upper liquid crystal display device 244 causes the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like to emit light, thereby providing the upper liquid crystal display device 244 to the player. The presentation of the effect can be noticed, and the effect of the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the plate unit 200 is provided with the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to a game state, when displaying an image indicating the arrival of a chance, the plate unit 200 is arranged outside the game area 5a. Since the arrival of a chance is suggested by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 being played, the player plays the game in the game area 5a and the effect on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a. And both can be bothered. Therefore, by paying attention to the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244), a tight game with a sense of speed can be enjoyed, and the interest of the player is reduced. When the image indicating the arrival of a chance is displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light so that the player can be displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244. Attention can be paid, and the arrival of a chance can be surely recognized and the player can be entertained. In this case, depending on the player, both the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a may be bothered, and the player may not be able to concentrate on either of them, thereby reducing the interest. Since the linear light-emitting lens members 237 and the like emit light in response to the arrival, the player can concentrate in the game area 5a until the linear light-emitting lens members 237 and the like emit light, and can enjoy a game in the game area 5a. At the same time, when the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, the effect on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed, and the game can be sharpened so as not to get tired.

  In addition, since the plate unit 200 bulging to the player side below the game area 5a is provided with the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is arranged at a position close to the player. Become. As a result, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is easily hidden by a player located in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is difficult to be seen by another player next to or behind. The effect presented by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, while enjoying the performance of the upper liquid crystal display device 244, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort and lowering the interest by being peeped by another player, and to reduce the interest in the upper liquid crystal display device. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light when presenting the effect by the 244, the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be hardly overlooked, and the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

  Further, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in a band shape, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be made more conspicuous as compared with the case of emitting light in a dot shape, and Even if the consciousness is concentrated in the game area 5a, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the effects by the upper liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246, and the like can be enjoyed. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light in a band shape, the light emission mode is different from the light emission of other light-emitting decorative bodies and the like. Light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be reliably noticed.

  In addition, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at a position on the rear side of the outer peripheral edge of the upper liquid crystal display device 244 near the game area 5a, when the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light, The light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can easily enter the field of view of the player, and the effect of the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed by noticing the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like.

  Further, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, a rendering operation unit 200 having the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the like is provided, and the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is placed in the game area 5a. When the player turns his gaze to the upper plate 201 at a certain frequency, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 etc. It is easy to enter the field of view, and it is easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Further, since the player turns his or her gaze to the upper plate 201 at a certain frequency, it is easy to direct the line of sight to the upper plate 201 (the upper liquid crystal display device 244) from within the game area 5a. Therefore, when the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, the line of sight can be immediately transferred to the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect presented by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed, thereby reducing the interest. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the rendering operation unit 200 is arranged below the game area 5a, and the player is irradiated with light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like from below, so that it is arranged above the game area 5a. As compared with, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed by the player, and the player can be surely noticed by the upper liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to prevent the effect of the operation unit 200 from being enjoyed and to prevent the interest from being reduced.

  Further, since the effect operation unit 200 (upper liquid crystal display device 244) is arranged at a position corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, the center of the player's line of sight is located at any position in the game area 5a. However, the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the player can be surely focused on the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the effect operation unit 200 can be enjoyed. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit 200 is provided with the touch panel 246, in addition to the effect by the image, it is possible to perform an effect of causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, and to entertain the player with various effects. By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, it is possible to cause the player to participate in the effect, and to actively entertain the effect to the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, the linear light-emitting lens member 237 (the linear light-emitting portion 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B sends the game ball on the upper plate 201 to the ball feed unit 540 (the ball firing device 680). In addition to being arranged along the guiding passage portion 212a to be fed, an upper tray ball removing button 239 for operating the upper tray ball removing unit 310 is disposed between the guiding passage portion 212a and the guiding passage portion 212a. That is, a configuration in which the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of a place where a player checks a game ball necessary for the game, and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position where the player cares even during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 can be noticed, and the player's interest is attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the effect by the touch unit 220B (the effect image by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the effect of the touch panel 246) Touch operation, etc.) can be easily noticed.

  Further, the touch unit 220B having the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is attached to the upper surface of the lower plate cover portion 262 of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231. And the waterproof unit 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Even if the condensed water (water droplets) flows below the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262), it is possible to prevent the dewed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and the touch unit 220B Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42, the post-upper decoration substrate 235 for emitting and decorating the upper-post decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201. It is not exposed to the water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, so that it is possible to prevent a problem such as a short circuit or corrosion from occurring in the decorative plate 235 after the upper plate.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200, when the touch unit 220B including the touch panel 246 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibration device 242, a plurality (two) of the touch units 220B are provided. The vibration of the touch unit 220B (the vibration device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and is transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A because the vibration of the touch unit 220B (the vibrating device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the mounting unit 220A. As a result, the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Therefore, when the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibrating device 242 when the touch operation is performed on the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B, only the touch unit 220B vibrates. The operation feeling of the touch panel 246 can be sufficiently imparted, and the player can enjoy the touch operation of the touch panel 246, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibration device 242, in addition to the operational feeling of the touch panel 246, the player is surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B or suggests the timing of operating the touch panel 246. It is possible to entertain the operation effect by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B is supported from below by the plurality of dampers 222, even if an impact or a load is applied to the touch unit 220B by hitting or strongly pressing the touch unit 220B from the upper side, the damper 222 may be used. Since the impact and the like can be absorbed, damage to the touch unit 220B and the mounting base unit 220A and the like due to the impact and the like can be reduced, and the game is interrupted due to the damage to the touch unit 220B and the like. Thus, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being reduced.

  Also, since the touch panel 220B is operated by the touch panel 246, the time during which the player touches the touch panel 246 becomes longer than when pressing a button. When the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242 when the user touches 246, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the finger (hand) of the player. Therefore, since the player can feel that the touch panel 246 is operated by vibrating the finger of the player, a sufficient operation feeling can be given, and the player can enjoy the operation of the touch panel 246. In this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, by changing the image displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, and it is possible to cope with various effects, It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the various effects and to reduce the interest in the game. Further, since the touch unit 220B includes the touch panel 246, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and Various operations such as holding can be performed. As a result, a variety of operation effects can be performed, and it is possible to prevent amusement of the player and to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Further, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A (unit case 231) so as not to be able to move upward and to be able to move downward, and the elastic force (biasing force) of the plurality of dampers 222 causes the touch unit 220B Is pressed against the upper moving end, it is possible to make it difficult for the touch unit 220B to move during the operation of the touch panel 246, and to easily perform the operation of the touch panel 246. In addition, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, it is possible to make the player think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B that does not move does not vibrate according to the game state. By vibrating by the device 242, the player can be surprised, and it is possible to prevent the player from having fun and to reduce the interest.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the plurality of vibrating devices 242 separated from each other, for example, by driving the vibrating device 242 on the touch panel 246 at a position close to the part operated by the player, the touch unit 220B is strong. Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the player operates a position different from the position to be operated on the touch panel 246, the vibration transmitted to the player will be different, so that the player is notified that the operation is wrong. Can be performed, and the player can perform a correct operation, and can enjoy the operation effect using the touch panel 246, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since a plurality of vibration devices 242 that are separated from each other are provided, a resonance phenomenon can be generated at an arbitrary position on the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency, strength, and the like of the vibration of each vibration device 242. Can be. Therefore, by controlling each of the vibrating devices 242 so that a resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to give a further operational feeling or to surprise the player greatly, It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by entertaining the player.

  Further, when an impact or a load acts on the touch unit 220B due to the touch unit 220B being hit or pressed strongly from above, the left and right ends of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 interposed therebetween. Therefore, the impact from the upper side can be absorbed to some extent (attenuated) by the damper 222 and the bending of the touch unit 220B and transmitted to the unit case 231 side. Further, on the unit case 231 side, since the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower attachment base 230, an impact or load from the touch unit 220B side via the unit case 231 is applied to the attachment base 230. And can be transmitted widely. At this time, the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e protruding downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c into which the receiving protrusion 231e is inserted at the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230. Since a gap is formed between the inner case and the inner peripheral wall, the receiving portion 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other after the unit case 231 is bent downward due to an impact or a load from the touch unit 220B. Thus, an impact or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the bending or the like of the unit case 231 is transmitted to the mounting base 230 in a state where the impact or the like is further attenuated. Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the receiving portion 231e comes into contact with the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, the receiving portion 231e (unit case) is formed. 231) Impacts, loads, and the like from the side are transmitted in an oblique direction to the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and along a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and along the bottom surface. The force in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (downward direction) for bending the mounting base 230 is reduced, and the force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit or pressed strongly from the upper side, the impact and the like can be effectively attenuated by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, and the mounting base 230, and the touch unit 220B Damage to the mounting base unit 220A can be suppressed.

[3-2. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 55B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind. FIG. 57 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed.

  As illustrated, the foul cover unit 520 of the present embodiment is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and is a shallow box-shaped unit main body 522 having an open front side, and is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 522. And a flat lid member 524. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner in front view, and penetrates the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210 a of the dish unit 200. A passage 526, a full ball receiving port 528 that opens rearward on the right side of the through-ball passage 526 in a front view and is communicable with the full tank guiding path 862 of the lower full-ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4; It has.

  Further, foul cover unit 520 opens upward on the right side in front view of full-ball receptacle 528 and does not reach game area 5a despite being fired by ball firing device 680 of main body frame 4. Ball receiving port 530 for receiving a game ball (a foul ball), and a full ball receiving port 528 that opens forward at the lower right corner in front view and discharges a game ball received in the full ball receiving port 530. And a ball discharge port 532 communicating with the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit 200.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is formed between the full ball reception port 528 and the foul ball reception port 530 and the ball discharge port 532 by the unit body 522 and the cover member 524, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 533 having a possible size, a flat movable piece 534 constituting a part of an inner wall of the storage passage 533, and a lower end rotatably attached to the unit body 522; A full tank detection sensor 535 for detecting rotation of the piece 534 in a direction away from the storage passage 533 and a spring 536 for urging the movable piece 534 toward the center of the storage passage 533 are provided.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 becomes full of game balls and the game balls are not discharged from the ball discharge port 532 to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 520 can be placed in the storage passage 533 to some extent. Game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 533, the movable piece 534 rotates so that the upper end of the movable piece 534 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 533 by the weight of the game ball, The rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535. Thereby, since it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full of game balls, when the full tank detection sensor 535 detects that the game tank is full, the payout of further game balls is stopped, and That fact can be notified to a player, a staff member of a game hall, or the like, and can be prompted to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 202.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 522 and below the penetrating ball passage 526, and the guideway opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 537 to which the operating projection 863e of the 863 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 80). The door opening / closing contact portion 537 is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface goes downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 537 is formed such that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operation protrusion 863 e of the guideway door member 863 comes into contact. When the operation protrusion 863e of the guideway opening / closing portion 863 abuts on the door opening / closing contact portion 537, the guideway door member 863 rotates, and the downstream ends (front opening) of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862. ) Can be opened.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 59 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. As illustrated, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. The body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to an island facility of a game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. It can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body base 600 that is partially insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and that can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably mounted, respectively, and the reinforcing frame 660 mounted to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in a front view are provided. .

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to a lower part of the front of the main body frame base 600, and a ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; A locking unit 700 that is mounted and locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and is mounted on the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out game balls to the player side; a board unit 900 mounted on the lower rear portion of the main body frame base 600; And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 58 to 61, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view shape extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth in a range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end, and a game board insertion slot 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game board. A game board placement section 602 that forms the lower side of the board insertion port 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and a left and right side of the lower end of the game board 5 that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement section 602. And a game board regulating unit 603 for regulating backward movement.

  In addition, the main body frame 4 includes a launching device mounting portion 604 formed on the lower right side of the game board placing portion 602 in front view for mounting the ball launching device 680, and front and rear right sides of the launching device mounting portion 604 in front view. And a low-pitched speaker of the board unit 900 which penetrates back and forth from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front in the left and right directions, and the cylinder insertion port 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted. Opening 606 that allows the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 to face forward, and a connection opening 606 that allows the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 to face forward. And

  Further, the main body frame 4 extends in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 601 to the rear in a front view, and has a locking unit 700 mounted on the right side surface, and a back cover 980 rotatably mounted on the rear end. A rear extension 608 is provided. The main body frame 4 is formed near the upper and lower ends at the left end of the rear surface when viewed from the front. An attachment portion 610 is provided.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be openable and closable, and a position slightly below the left side from the left and right center of the game board mounting part 602 in front view, And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 601.

[4-2. Upper hinge member on body frame side and lower hinge member on body frame side]
The body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640 are mounted on the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame 4.

  The main frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L-shape, and a columnar protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The upper hinge member 622 pivotally supported by the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, and the upper hinge main body 621 penetrates the upper hinge main body 621 on the left side in the front view of the upper hinge pin 622 to pivotally support the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side. Hinge hole 623 for a door frame for use. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 has a portion of the upper hinge body 621 bent downward, which is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the body frame 4.

  The main frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at a front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and a front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L-shape. A lower hinge hole (not shown) for the outer frame that is pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and a horizontally extending flat plate that is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641. The rear part of the plate-like member is bent upward in an L-shape and penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643 and the lower hinge second main body 643, and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 A door frame lower hinge hole 644 for pivotal support and a door frame extending upward from the left end behind the door frame lower hinge hole 644 at a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643. And a restricting piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of the third rotating member. .

  The lower hinge second main body 643 has a horizontally-extended portion with a predetermined interval above the horizontally-extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641, and a portion bent upward has a lower hinge first portion. The body 641 is in contact with the front surface of the portion bent upward. In this main body side lower hinge member 640, a portion bent upward of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the main body frame 4.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross section in a plan view with its right side opened, and extends vertically with a constant cross section. In addition, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and vertically behind a portion extending rightward from the front end. A pair of left positioning members 661 are mounted vertically separated from each other.

  The reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600, and also enters the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Illegal insertion of a tool can be prevented.

[4-4. Ball launching device]
The ball firing device 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58, 60, and 61. The ball firing device 680 is a device for driving game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this ball firing device 680, the hitting strength of the game ball changes according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 680 is mounted on a flat launching base 681 attached to the launching device attaching portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the rear surface of the launching base 681 on the right side in front view. A launch solenoid 682, which is a rotary solenoid that penetrates and extends forward, a hitting hammer 683 whose base end is attached to the rotation axis of the firing solenoid 682, and a diagonally upward left extension near the tip of the hitting hammer 683. And a launch rail 684 on which a game ball can be rolled.

  In this ball launching device 680, game balls are supplied from the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the firing rail 684, and the game balls are supplied to the upper right end of the firing rail 684. When the handle lever 504 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting hammer 683. The game ball hit by the ball hammer 683 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 684, and is hit into the game area 5a.

  If the hit ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball or the like, the distance between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). From the foul ball receiving unit 530 of the foul cover unit 520 below, and is discharged to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 520.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 includes a unit base 701 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units 700 protruding forward from the unit base 701 and locking with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower portion of the unit base 701 in a columnar shape, and from the front side. A key cylinder 710 for unlocking either the door frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703 in accordance with the rotation direction of the inserted unlock key.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 62 is a perspective view of the payout unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the payout unit viewed from the back. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 68 (a) is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device disassembled and viewed from behind. Further, FIG. 71A is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 71B is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. FIG. 72 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is closed by the movable ball removing piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 72 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is opened by the movable ball removing piece. It is. FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing, in an enlarged manner, a portion of the dispensing blade in the dispensing device.

  FIG. 74 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 74 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 75 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full ball path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 75 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from behind. is there. Further, FIG. 76 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 76 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full ball path unit as exploded from the front, and FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full ball path unit as exploded as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 79 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank route unit, and FIG. 79 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the taxiway opening / closing door is open. . FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full tank path unit. FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram showing a guideway opening / closing door according to an embodiment different from FIGS. 76 to 80. FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63 and the like, the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment is attached to an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and attached to an upper portion of the payout unit base 801. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape extending left and right and opened upward and attached to a payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. A left and right tank rail 803 for guiding the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 to the left in a front view. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left, and are aligned in two front and rear rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 82) that swings downward from above.

  The payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front. A payout device 830 detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and paying out game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from a payout control board accommodated in a payout control board box 950; , Is provided. The game balls circulate in two rows from the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, and the payout devices 830 pay out the game balls one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 downward, and according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. Guide path 861 that guides the game balls forward to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 from the front end, and guides the game balls discharged from the full tank discharge port 850e forward to the door frame 3 from the front end. The full-frame taxiway 862 that guides to the full tank receiving port 530, and the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the fullness taxiway 862 are set to the main body frame. And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 extending up and down and having a rear side opened, a box-shaped rear case 822 attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and having a front side opened, and a front case. A flat partition plate 823 that is attached between the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and that separates the front case 821 and the rear case 822 from each other. The front and rear ends of the partition plate 823 pass through the front case 821 and the rear race 822. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 mounted thereon, and a pair of movable piece members front 825 and rear 826 mounted rotatably by the shaft member 824 and arranged in the front case and the rear case, respectively. Ball detection sensor 827 mounted in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational position of the pair of movable piece members 825 before and 826 after the movable piece member.

  The front case 821 has a ball guiding entrance 821a which is open at the upper part of the right side thereof so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a ball guiding exit which is open at a position closer to the right side than the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. 821b, and a guiding path 821c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 821a and the ball guiding outlet 821b and through which game balls can flow. The guide passage 821c extends from the ball guide entrance 821a to the vicinity of the left end thereof at an obliquely lower angle with respect to the horizontal at a small angle, and at the center of the height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introducer 821d. The detection unit 821e includes a detection unit 821e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering unit 821f that extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 821d to the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 has a cutout portion 821g on the right wall of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c when viewed from the front.

  The rear case 822 has a ball guiding entrance 822a that is open at the upper part of the right side thereof so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a ball guidance exit that opens at a position closer to the right side than the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. 822b, and a guiding path 822c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 822a and the ball guiding outlet 822b and through which game balls can flow. The guiding passage 822c extends obliquely from the ball guiding entrance 822a to the vicinity of the left end so as to be lower at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and the center of the height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introducing portion 822d. The detection section 822e includes a detection section 822e that extends straight down to the vicinity, and a meandering section 822f that extends in a meandering manner from the detection section 822d to the left and right widths of the rear case 822. In addition, the rear case 822 includes a cutout portion 822g on the right wall of the detection portion 822e in the guide passage 822c when viewed from the front.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821. When the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the rear case 822 is formed so that the guiding passage 821c and the guiding passage 822c coincide with each other. I have.

  The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 includes a vertically movable flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a, a shaft hole 825b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right surface of the movable piece 825a, and through which a shaft member 824 is inserted, and a movable piece 825a. An extension 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 825a. The extension 825c and the movable piece 825a are connected to each other, and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. A connecting portion 825d, a weight mounting portion 825e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through hole penetrating forward and backward; A detection piece 825f which extends outward from the right end and which can be detected by the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and a flat extension outward from a position close to the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 passes through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attachment portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. Then, the movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, when the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the cutout portion 821g of the front case 821, and the lower end of the movable piece 825a projects into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is The state is brought into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 821c (detection unit 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts on the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is prevented from further rotating in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 821c (leftward in front view). In addition, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in a direction (to the right in a front view) in which the lower end of the movable piece 825a approaches the wall of the guide path 821c, the left surface of the movable piece 825a Coincide with the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a state in which the detection piece 825f is not detected with respect to the ball out detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 821c, the ball-out detection sensor 827 does not detect.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a vertically movable plate-like movable piece 826a, a shaft hole 826b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a, and through which a shaft member 824 is inserted, and a movable piece 826a. An extension 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and the extension 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other, and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. A connecting portion 826d, a weight mounting portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and has a through hole penetrating forward and backward, and A detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end and that can be detected by the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and a flat extension that extends outward from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attachment portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is positioned directly below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the cutout portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a projects into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g is The state is in contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c (detection unit 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts on the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is prevented from further rotating in the direction that projects into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). In addition, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in a direction (to the right in front view) so as to approach the wall of the guide passage 822c, the left surface of the movable piece 826a Coincide with the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f at the front of the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball cut detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 822c, the ball-out detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls being arranged in a row in front and rear by a tank rail 803, and a plurality of game balls are arranged in a row. 822 allows the user to be guided back and forth in two rows to the lower payout device 830 (see FIG. 82). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and can flow well. Can be.

  Further, when the game ball flows through the guide paths 821c and 822c of the ball guiding unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the front 825 and the rear 826 of the movable piece, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are moved. The front of the movable piece 825 and the rear of the movable piece 826 rotate in the direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that a game ball is present in the guide paths 821c and 822c.

  When the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guiding unit 820 pays out the game balls, the game balls in the guide paths 821c and 822c flow downstream. When the game balls flow in the guidance passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game balls flowing in the introduction portions 821d and 822d increases, and the game balls flowing in the introduction portions 821d and 822d are movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It rebounds to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable balls 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game ball, the vibrations cause the movable pieces 825a and 826a to be caught or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Scratched dust and dirt can be removed, and the movable pieces 825 and 826a can be favorably rotated by their own weight and the like.

  Further, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls flowing through the respective guiding passages 821c and 822c by using separate movable member fronts 825 and 826, respectively, and also detects the movable ball front 825 and movable ball. Since the respective detection pieces 825f and 826f of the one-member rear 826 are detected by one ball-cut detection sensor 827, when the game ball in one of the guide paths 821c and 822c runs out, the front of the movable piece 825 is lost. Alternatively, the movable pieces 825a and 826a behind the movable piece member 826 rotate so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball has disappeared are detected by the ball out detection sensor 827. . Therefore, since the running out of the game ball can be detected at an early stage, the game ball can be quickly replenished, and the time during which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, by screwing metal screws as weights into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e of the front movable member 825 and the rear movable member 826, the weight of the front movable member 825, the movable member rear 826, and the weight of the weight. By this, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction protruding into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably mounted outside the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. No dust or dust adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even when the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls. Thus, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be prevented from rotating.

  As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment includes the movable pieces 825a and 826a at the front of the movable piece member 825 and the rear of the movable piece member 826 whose lower ends protrude into the guide paths 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow by their own weight. By attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface in contact with the game ball, the movable piece 825a is determined by the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 826 and the weight of the weight. , 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c, 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably mounted outside the guide passage 822c, and the lower ends protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt in the guide passages 821c and 822c are provided. And the like do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even when the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls. Thus, the movable pieces 825a and 826 (the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member) can be prevented from rotating.

  Also, Metal screws as weights, The weight mounting portion 825e formed as a through hole, 826e Even if the front of the movable member 825 and the rear of the movable member 826 frequently rotate, The weight is 825 before the movable piece member and 826 after the movable piece member (weight attachment portion 825e, 826e) For a long period of time, the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be maintained in a good state. Also, Weight mounting portion 825e, Just screw a metal screw into 826e, Since the weight can be easily attached to the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member, The labor of mounting the weight can be simplified, Costs associated with assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the guide passages 821c and 822c are provided with an introduction portion 822d for guiding game balls toward the movable pieces 825a and 825c, on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 825c protrude inside. When the game ball flows in the passages 821c and 822c, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, by vibrating the movable pieces 825a and 826a, it is possible to remove dust, dirt, and the like that have been caught or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c. The front part 825 and the rear part 826 of the movable part can be favorably rotated.

  Therefore, since the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be favorably rotated, the state (presence or absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball can be detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem due to erroneous detection or the like. Even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide balls 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that promptness can be obtained. Can be replenished with game balls, and by reducing the time during which the game is interrupted as short as possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The payout device 830 has a box shape with an open rear side, and has a payout opening 831a that is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. Payout exit 831b, a ball extraction outlet 831c that is open near the right end of the bottom surface in front view so that game balls can pass through, and a payout passage 831d that connects the payout inlet 831a and the payout outlet 831b and through which game balls can flow. And a front box 831 that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball extraction outlet 831c and has a ball extraction passage 831e through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A payout opening 832a, which has a box shape with an open front side and is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface so that game balls can pass therethrough, and game balls near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. The dispensing outlet 832b is opened to be able to pass through, the ball extracting outlet 832c is opened near the right end of the bottom surface in front view so that the game ball can pass, and the dispensing inlet 832a communicates with the dispensing outlet 832b so that the game ball is distributed. It includes a possible payout passage 832d and a rear box 832 that has a ball free passage 832e that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 832d and communicates with the ball emptying outlet 832c, and through which game balls can flow.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and is a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 whose rear side is open, and is attached to the inside of the front box 831 so that the rotating shaft passes through the front box 831. The dispensing motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, a driving gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 834, meshes with the driving gear 835, and can be rotated by the front box 831 and the front cover 833. , A driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 penetrating rotatably, and a front end attached to the front cover 833 and A shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and a shaft member 837 penetrates the shaft member 837, which is rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832. A dispensing blade 839 that is disposed in the passages 831d and 832d and rotates integrally with the driven gear 837, and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is mounted between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detects the rotation of the discharging blade 839. And

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and has a flat partition plate 841 for separating the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832; And a rear box 832, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting a game ball discharged by the rotation of the payout blade 839 and discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, payout passages 831d and 832d, and a ball emptying passage. 831e and 832e are diverged from each other and are rotatably mounted by a front box 831 and a rear box 832 to close the ball removal passages 831e and 832e. A ball release lever 844 slidably mounted vertically slidably on the upper right side of the box 832 to make the ball release movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable; It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout entrance 831a to the ball ejection outlet 831c, and is lower at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. Bends to extend vertically to the left, near the center of the total height, to the left to extend substantially horizontally, and then extends vertically downward about 1/3 from the left end to the left and right width of the front box 831 again Thus, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located immediately above the dispensing outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 831b. The dispensing blade 839 is disposed at a portion of the dispensing passage 831d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball emptying passage 831e is a form in which a portion extending obliquely to the lower right from the payout entrance 831a in the payout passage 831d is further extended. It diverges to the height near the center.

  In addition, the front box 831 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the payout exit 831b in the payout passage 831d, and protruding rearward as it goes downward, and is formed at an upper portion on the right side in front view. And a lever mounting portion 831g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout inlet 832a to the ball-pulling outlet 832c, and is lower at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. After being bent so as to extend vertically to the left and approximately horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right widths of the rear box 832. Thus, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located immediately above the dispensing outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the rear box 832, and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 832b. The dispensing blade 839 is disposed at a portion of the dispensing passage 832d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball emptying passage 832e is a form in which the portion extending obliquely downward and to the right from the payout entrance 832a in the payout passage 832d is further extended from the height of about 1/3 from the upper surface to the total height of the rear box 832. It diverges to the height near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the payout exit 832b in the payout passage 832d, and is formed at an upper portion of a guide shelf 832f protruding forward as it goes downward, and on the right side in front view. And a lever mounting portion 832g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The pay-out passages 831d and 832d and the ball empty passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the back box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the payout blades 839 are arranged. Further, between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached. In other words, the game balls flowing through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls flowing through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are separated from the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought near the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an interval of 60 degrees in the circumferential direction from a spur gear-shaped gear portion 837a meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. It has a plurality of detecting pieces 837b and a connecting portion 837c that protrudes rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a in a cylindrical shape and has a concave / convex shape on the peripheral surface at the rear end and can be connected to the dispensing blade 839. .

  The dispensing blade 839 extends cylindrically forward and backward, and protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a at regular intervals in a circumferential direction from a front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted. A plurality of (three) front blades 839b and a plurality of (which are perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a projecting from the rear end of the base cylinder portion 839a in the circumferential direction at regular intervals so as to be alternated with the front blades 839b. 3) A rear blade 839c and a connected portion that projects cylindrically forward from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a and that has irregularities that can be connected to the connecting portion 387c of the driven gear 837 at the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

  The front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c of the dispensing blade 839 are provided three each at an interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 839c is rotated relative to the front blade 839b so as to be staggered. It extends outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc depressed toward the center, and the diameter of the arc is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c), a ball housing portion 839e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

  Also, the three front blades 839b and the rear blade 839c are formed such that the outer diameter D1 of the outer periphery of the base cylinder portion 839a about the axis thereof is 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. The diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder 839a up to the part closest to the axis of the base cylinder 839a in the arcuate region (sphere housing 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). Is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 73). That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most concave portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is four times.

  Therefore, it is possible to hold approximately 3/10 (between 1/4 to 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball by the arc portion (ball accommodation portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. Thereby, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be promptly accommodated between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c) (the ball accommodating portion 839e).

  In the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, with the dispensing device 830 assembled, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out respectively. Further, the discharge blade 839 is disposed at a position below the center of the entire height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832 in the discharge passages 831d and 832d, and is bent in a crank shape. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the rotation center of the payout blade 839 is located immediately below a portion that extends vertically downward from near the center of the entire height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. Then, in the portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d that are bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the payout blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the payout blade 839, and the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 62). In the present embodiment, the distance S is set to 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most concave portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

  As a result, the payout device 830 can pass through the crank-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 839 comes into contact with the outer periphery of the front blades 839b and 839c. Therefore, it is not discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839, and can pass through the crank-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d, and from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Released downward.

  In the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to be about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer diameter of the game ball is reduced to 1 by the ball accommodating portion 839e. Since a depth of / 7 to ４ is accommodated, the time required to accommodate the game ball can be shortened while the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 is made as small as possible. Thereby, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated quickly, the game balls can be stored in the ball storage portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the related art, and the time required for paying out game balls can be shortened.

  The ball-moving movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape up and down and back and forth, and has a body portion 843a whose lower portion is bent to form a letter shape when viewed from the front, and a tubular shape that extends back and forth at the upper end of the body portion 843a. A shaft cylinder portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the outer side surface of the main body portion 843a which is bent, and a main body portion 843c. And a weight mounting portion 843d (see FIG. 72) formed of a through hole penetrating back and forth at a lower portion bent in a V-shape.

  When the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball-moving movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower part of the main body 843a extends obliquely to the lower left in front view, and the shaft cylinder portion 843b at the upper end dispenses the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is rotatable at a position extending obliquely to the lower right in front view from the payout entrances 831a and 832a and at a position outside the wall on the right side in front view slightly higher than the portion bent downward. Mounted on

  The dispensing device 830 of the present embodiment has a state in which the ball-pulling lever 844 is slid downward in a normal state, and the lower part of the ball-pulling lever 844 is brought into contact with the projecting portion 843c of the ball-pulling movable piece 843 from the right in front view. In contact. Thereby, the rotation of the ball-moving movable piece 843 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front is restricted (see FIG. 72A).

  In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a of the ball-moving movable piece 843 that is bent in a rectangular shape, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is obliquely lower left in front view. Extending to The lower end of the main body 843a is located near a portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball-out passages 831e and 832e are branched. Accordingly, the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removing movable piece 843 (the main body 843a), and the surface facing the left side of the main body 843a forms a partial wall of the payout passages 831d and 832d. are doing.

  The ball-moving movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that, in a normal state, the center of gravity of the ball-moving movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the shaft cylinder portion 843b. Although a force for rotating the anti-clockwise rotation in a front view is exerted by this, the rotation in the counterclockwise direction is regulated by the ball release lever 844, so that the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower portion of the ball pulling lever 844 separates from the protrusion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise in front view. Restrictions on movement are lifted. Accordingly, the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located directly below the shaft cylinder portion 843b. Note that the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the right side surface of the lower part of the main body 843a contacts the left surfaces of the members forming the right sides of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 61 (b)). As a result, the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game balls entering from the payout openings 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removing passages 831e and 832e to be discharged downward from the ball removing outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball-moving movable piece 843 is provided with the weight mounting portion 843d, a weight made of a metal screw is screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d to mount the ball-moving lever 843 upward. Then, when the regulation of the counterclockwise rotation in the front view is released, the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 projects into the ball removing passages 381e and 832e due to the own weight of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be easily rotated in the direction (counterclockwise in front view).

  In a normal state in which the ball-pulling lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball-pulling passages 831e and 832e, game balls entering from the payout ports 831a and 832a are transferred to the main body 843a of the ball-pulling movable piece 843. Since the contact is made with the game ball, the ball-moving movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact. Therefore, dust, dust, and the like that are caught or intruded between the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removing passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removing movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball-moving movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate due to biting, dust, or the like.

  In addition, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d formed as a through-hole, the weight can be moved even if the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates frequently. The weight-moving piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without coming off from the (weight attachment portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball-moving movable piece 843 only by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. Can be reduced.

  If the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long time by the ball removing movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable piece 843, or the rotating shaft rusts, and the ball removing movable piece 843 rusts. The movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the movable ball removing piece 843. , 832e are closed, and when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the closure is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 843. The ball removing movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removing passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball removing lever 844 is operated to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, the ball removing movable piece 843 can be favorably rotated, so that the game ball can be reliably removed. In addition, workability during maintenance and the like can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to a position below the payout device 830 in the payout unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 851 with an open rear side, and is mounted on the rear side of the upper full tank base 851 and has a front open side. It has a box-shaped upper full cover 852 and a dispensing device pressing member 853 rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 830 upward.

  In addition, the upper full tank path unit 850 includes an upper payout ball receiving opening 850a that is open upward to allow a game ball to pass therethrough at a position on the left side from the left and right center in the front view on the upper surface, and a right side from the left and right center in the front view on the upper surface. Is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper ball storage passage 850c of a predetermined size through which game balls flow, a normal discharge port 850d opening downward at a lower portion of the upper ball storage passage 850c immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a, and an upper ball storage passage A full tank discharge port 850e that opens downward at a position other than the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, a normal discharge port 850d, and a full tank discharge port 850e. And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  In addition, the upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball emptying path 850g that guides game balls entering from the upper ball emptying entrance 850b downward, and an upper part that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball emptying path 850g. 850h, which is a ball extraction outlet. In the upper full tank path unit 850, a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball ejection outlet 850h are sequentially opened from the left side in a front view and downward. The upper full tank path unit 850 includes a back cover mounting portion 854 for mounting the back cover 980 on the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

  When the upper full ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlet 831b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball removing inlet 850b is It is located immediately below the ball ejection outlet 831c of the dispensing device 830. In addition, the upper full tank path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, and the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball discharge outlet 850h are connected to the normal guide path of the lower full tank path unit 860. 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball guide path 865, each opening directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 82).

  In the upper full ball path unit 850, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlet 831b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, a game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper discharge ball reception opening 850a is opened directly below the upper discharge ball reception 850a. From the normal discharge port 850d.

  When the inside of the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be stored, and the inside of the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with game balls, the normal release is performed. The outlet 850d is in a closed state. When a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of the game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition piece 850f, the game balls newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c get over the partition piece 850f and become full. It is discharged downward from the tongue discharge port 850e, and is sent to the lower plate 202 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860.

  As described above, the upper full tank path unit 850 automatically transfers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 201 in accordance with the amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 202.

[4-6d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached below the upper full tank path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game balls released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward, and guides the game balls from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 through the normal guide path 861. And a full tank guide path 862 that guides the game balls released from the full tank discharge port 850 e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward and guides them from the front end to the full tank receiver 530 of the door frame 3, A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 by connecting the guideway open / close door 863 to the normal guideway 861. And a closing spring 864 that urges the front end opening in a direction to close the opening.

  In addition, the lower full ball path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the upper ball extraction outlet 850h of the upper full ball path unit 850 to the front, and from the center right end in the front-rear direction on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900. And a lower ball-free guideway 865 that discharges the air to the bottom.

  In the lower full tank path unit 860, a normal taxiway 861, a full tank taxiway 862, and a lower ball empty taxiway 865 are arranged in order from left to right in front view. The rear ends of the normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower ball empty taxiway 865 are open upward. Further, the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged on the left and right, and extend forward to near the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lower. Further, the full taxiway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal taxiway 861. The normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball empty guide path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be vertically divided as shown in the figure.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867, and is rotated clockwise in front view by a closing spring 864. Being energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full sphere path unit 860, a full tank guide path 862 opening to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view is one game with respect to the normal guide path 861. It is arranged at a position lower than the height of the sphere. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and on the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 includes a disc-shaped base 863a that is rotatably mounted, a first door plate portion 863b that extends obliquely to the upper left from the base 863a and that can close the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending in a flat plate shape to the right from the base portion 863a and capable of closing the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862, and an extension portion 863d extending in a plate shape diagonally to the lower left from the base portion 863a. And an operating projection 863e that projects forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extension 863d and that can abut on the door opening / closing abutment 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3.

  Here, to close the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 means that the openings do not need to be closed, and it is sufficient that the game balls cannot pass through. The operation projection 863e has a short arc shape centered on the base 863a when viewed from the front, and is inclined so that the front end face projects forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. are doing.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is moved from the front end of the lower cover 867 from below the front end opening of the full guideway 862. By contacting the boss 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the lower ball-filled ball path unit 860 according to the present embodiment has a front end formed with a through-ball passage 526, a ball-filled ball socket 530, and a door opening / closing port in the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 537 (see FIG. 80). When the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the guideway opening / closing door 863 does not abut on the operation protrusion 863 e. As a result, it is rotated clockwise in a front view, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 79). (A)). Therefore, in this state, the game balls in the normal taxiway 861 and the full-filled taxiway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal taxiway 861 and the full-filled taxiway The game ball does not spill from the road 862.

  Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operating projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863, and the door frame 3 is activated. Due to the inclination of the front end face of the projection 863e, a force acts on the guideway opening / closing door 863 in a counterclockwise direction in front view against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that have closed the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal taxiway 861 And the front end opening of the full tank guiding path 862 is opened (see FIG. 79 (b)). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 and the second door plate 863c is located above the front end opening of the full guideway 862. .

  In a state where the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4 and the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank are full. At the front side of the front end opening of the taxiway 862, the penetrating sphere passage 526 of the foul cover unit 520 and the full sphere receiving port 528 in the door frame 3 are located. A game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 526 and the full ball receiving port 528 side.

  In this way, the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made different from each other in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are rotated by rotating the taxiway opening / closing door 863. Since the doors are opened and closed, the operating range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 can be reduced in size. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be more effectively utilized.

  The payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is configured such that the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is full of game balls and the game balls cannot be released to the upper plate 201. Is paid out, game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank route unit 860 is full of game balls. Then, when game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal taxiway 861 is full of game balls, the game balls are normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. When it remains above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it flows to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, The payout of the game ball to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 520 is automatically switched. Thereafter, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830, and the lower plate 202 in addition to the upper plate 201 becomes full of the game balls and cannot supply the game balls to the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 520 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 533 of. When the movable piece 534 rotates and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535 when the game balls are stored in the storage passage 533, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls. Is notified, and the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535 is released.

  The stop of the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 in response to the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535 is performed, for example, until the movable balls 534 are detected in the storage passage 533 of the foul cover unit 520. In this state, the number that can fill the storage path 533 on the upstream side, the full guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, and the upper sphere storage path 850 c of the upper full tank path unit 850. When the game balls are paid out, the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 may be stopped. Thereby, since more game balls can be stored than the conventional pachinko machine, in a game state in which many game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are dispensed by paying out game balls. It is possible to reduce the necessity of worrying about being full of game balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on the jackpot game and entertain.

  As described above, in the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, more game balls can be stored in the upper full ball path unit 850 and the lower full ball path unit 860 than in the conventional pachinko machine, When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the frame 4, if many game balls are stored in the upper full ball path unit 850 and the lower full ball path unit 860, the load of these game balls is usually induced. This greatly acts on the guideway opening / closing door 863 that closes the front end opening of the road 861 and the full tank guideway 862, and the guideway opening / closing door 863 may be easily damaged. Therefore, a guideway opening / closing door 870 of the embodiment shown in FIG. 81 may be used.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 870 shown in FIG. 81 includes a disc-shaped base 870a rotatably mounted and a first door that extends obliquely to the upper left from the base 870a and can close the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861. A plate portion 870b, a second door plate portion 870c extending in a flat plate shape to the right from the base portion 870a and capable of closing a front end opening of the full guide path 862; An extension (not shown); and an operating projection 870 e that projects forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extension and can abut on the door opening / closing abutment 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3. ing. The guideway opening / closing door 870 includes a plurality of recesses 870 into which a part of a game ball fits, on the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c.

  As shown, the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c of the taxiway opening / closing door 870 are obliquely inclined so as to move rearward as the distance from the base 870a increases. Therefore, when the game ball rolling forward in the normal taxiway 861 or the full tank taxiway 862 abuts on the rear surface of the first door plate portion 870b or the second door plate portion 870c, the rear surface is inclined. It rolls to the base 870a side, and the game balls stored in the normal taxiway 861 or the full tank taxiway 862 can be brought to the base 870a side. Thereby, the load of the game balls stored in the normal taxiway 861 or the full tank taxiway 862 is applied to the base 870a attached to the lower case 867 in the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c. Since the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c are hardly deformed because they act at close positions, the guideway opening / closing door 870 is hardly damaged, and the durability can be enhanced.

  As shown in the figure, the plurality of recesses 870d of the taxiway opening / closing door 870 are held at positions on the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c where the game ball is shifted toward the base 870a. Are arranged as follows. As a result, the game balls flowing through the normal taxiway 861 or the full tank taxiway 862 fit into the concave portion 870d, so that the game balls can be reliably shifted to the base 870a side, and the same as described above. Action and effect can be obtained.

  Although not shown, the concave portion 870d extends in an arc around the base 870a so that the guideway opening / closing door 870 can rotate even when the game ball is fitted.

  In this case, it is desirable that the left and right widths W of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 be different from an integral multiple of the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game balls brought to the base 870a side by the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c are separated from the game balls contacting the rear side by the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway. When the game balls 862 abut against the left and right inner walls, the direction of the load applied from the rear game ball is directed obliquely forward toward the base 870a, and the load is applied to the base 870a attached to the case 867. Can be made to act more, and the above-mentioned effects can be surely exerted.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a bass speaker mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view. Speaker unit 920, a power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side in front view of the rear side of the board unit base 910, and a power supply board is housed therein, and an interface control mounted on the back side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which a board is accommodated, and a payout control board box which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and in which a payout control board for controlling payout of game balls is accommodated. 950.

  The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of gaming board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 83 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left. FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from behind. Further, FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 89 is a front perspective view showing only the front components and the game panel in the game board, and FIG. 90 is a rear perspective view showing only the front components and the game panel in the game board.

  As shown, the game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. Further, the game board 5 is provided with a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 so that the rear end of the game area 5a A plate-shaped gaming panel 1100 to be partitioned, a substrate holder 1200 attached to a lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, which is driven by driving game balls into the gaming area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board for controlling the game content to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

  Also, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel 1100. A central liquid crystal display device 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 so as to be visible from the front side; a peripheral control unit 1600 attached to the rear side of the central liquid crystal display device 1500; And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

  The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds a transparent flat panel plate 1110 and an outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear side and on the rear side.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general prize ports 2001 which are always open, and a plurality of general prize ports 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept a game ball, a gate 2003 mounted at a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting the passage of the game ball, and a game ball passing through the gate 2003 The second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn by the player, and the first lottery selected by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A lower winning prize port 2005 and an upper winning prize port 2006 are provided in which game balls can be accepted in accordance with either the special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  Also, a starting port unit 2100 which is mounted just above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction within the technique area 5a and has a first starting port 2002, and an inner rail 1002 which is at the left of the starting port unit 2100 in a front view. Side unit 2200 which is attached along and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and one general winning opening 2001, a gate unit 2003 and a second starting opening which are attached to the right of the starting unit 2100. 2004, and an attacker unit 2300 having a lower winning opening 2005, and a frame attached above the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2300 and having an upper winning opening 2006. And the center role 2500.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-shaped back box 3010 that is open at the front. There is provided a mechanism 3020, a lower left ball passage unit 3030 attached near the lower left front end of the back box 3010, and a lower right ball passage unit 3040 attached near the lower right front end of the back box 3010.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a lamp driving board 3060 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the left side of the opening 3010a in rear view, a lamp driving board cover 3061 covering the rear of the lamp driving board 3060, and a back box 3010. A motor drive board 3062 mounted on the rear side of the opening 3010a below the rear view, a motor drive board cover 3063 covering the rear side of the motor drive board 3062, and a rear face of the back box 3010 mounted on the lower left corner of the rear view. Panel relay board 3064.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back peripheral decoration unit 3080 attached along the upper side and the left side at the front end of the back box 3010, and a back upper movable effect unit mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. 3100, a lower back front movable effect unit 3200 attached below the opening 3010 a near the front end in the back box 3010, and a back right movable effect attached to the right side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The unit 3300, the back left movable production unit 3400 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the rear production unit 3200 installed below the opening 3010a and in the back box 3010 in the back box 3010. The back-to-back movable production unit 3500, the back-to-back movable production unit 3100 and the back-to-back movable in the back box 3010 A back corners movable direction unit 3600 attached to the respective left and right sides of the output unit 3500, and a.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower left end from the center in the left-right direction in front view and extending clockwise in the circumferential direction in front view, passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in front view, and extending obliquely to the upper right, An inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. And an out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the area 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and having an upper portion curved inside the front component 1000; an upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail And an impact portion 1006 that connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and that a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member that is turned by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction and rotatable only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened and the closed position. 1007.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface. The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. The panel plate 1110 has a plurality of mounting holes 1112 (see FIGS. 89 and 90) penetrating back and forth for mounting the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 from the rear side. Further, panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting back unit 3000 and a plurality of positioning holes formed on the rear surface.

  When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel board 1110 is opened at the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thus, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guiding section 1003, and can be discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper part and the front part opened, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. When the board holder 1200 is assembled on the game board 5, the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 can be covered from below. Thereby, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged part 1201 (see FIG. 87).

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board (not shown) for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board and is attached to the board holder 1200. Have.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Must be performed, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against unauthorized actions on the main control board is enhanced.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 83 and the like. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs to display a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator made up of one LED for displaying a game state, and two state display units for displaying a normal lottery result selected by passing a game ball to a gate unit to be described later. A normal symbol display consisting of LEDs, a normal hold display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the passage of game balls to the gate portion, and a lottery drawn by accepting game balls to a first starting port described later. A first special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result, and a first special reserve number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves for accepting game balls to the first starting port. A second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying a second special lottery result drawn by accepting a game ball into a second starting port, which will be described later, and a person in charge of receiving a game ball into the second starting port A second special holding number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit", etc. A round indicator comprising two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (round number) of the opening / closing pattern.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Central liquid crystal display]
Next, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of a rear wall of the back box 3010. This central liquid crystal display device 1500 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display a still image or a moving image.

  87. As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 has two left fixing pieces 1501 protruding outward from the left side in front view, and right fixing pieces protruding outward from the right side in front view. 1502. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 is provided with two fixing grooves, which are opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view, in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward, and After inserting two left fixing pieces 1501 from diagonally behind 3010, the right fixing piece 1502 is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1502 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism, and the lock mechanism is slid downward. Thereby, it is attached to the back box 3010.

[5-7. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. The peripheral control unit 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. Although not shown, the peripheral control unit 1600 displays a peripheral control board that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control substrate, and a display of an effect image displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. An image display control board to be controlled, a ROM board having a ROM in which effect images, effect sounds, effect control programs, and the like are stored, and a peripheral control board, an image display control board, and a peripheral housing the ROM board And a control board box 1620.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the starting port unit of the front unit as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit as viewed from the lower rear. FIG. 94 (a) is a perspective view of the side unit of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 94 (b) is a perspective view of the side unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 95 (a) is a perspective view of the attacker unit of the front unit viewed from the upper front, FIG. 95 (b) is a perspective view of the attacker unit viewed from the upper rear, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the center role of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 97 is a perspective view of the center role of the front unit as viewed from the back.

  The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. The front end protrudes forward from the front of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the mounting opening 1112. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is configured such that a plurality of general winning openings 2001, which are capable of receiving a game ball hit into the gaming region 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001, are within the gaming region 5a. A first start port 2002 which is always open to accept a game ball at a different position, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, A second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing through the section 2003, and a lottery performed by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. The lower special winning opening 2005 and the upper special winning opening 2006 that allow the reception of a game ball in either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  A plurality of (four in this example) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate section 2003 is disposed on the right side in the game area 5a and downward from the center in the up-down direction. The second start port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate unit 2003. The lower large winning opening 2005 is located below the second starting opening 2004 and near the lower end in the game area 5a. The upper winning a prize port 2005 is arranged above the second starting port 2004 near the upper end of the gaming area 5a.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted just above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first starting port 2002 and a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002. Side unit 2200 which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 and has a plurality (three in this case) of general winning openings 2001, and one general winning which is mounted on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100. An attacker unit 2300 having a mouth 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a lower winning opening 2005, and is mounted above the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2300. And a frame-shaped center item 2500 having a special winning opening 2006.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. The starting port unit 2100 is disposed in the game area 5a, near the lower end in the left-right direction, immediately above the out port 1111 and attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002.

  The starting port unit 2100 includes a unit base 2101 attached to the panel plate 1110, a ball receiving member 2102 attached to the upper front surface of the unit base 2101 and protruding forward and forming a first starting port 2002. A box frame-shaped front decoration base 2103 attached to the front surface of the unit base 2101 below the ball receiving member 2102, protruding forward and extending left and right, and a front surface of the unit base 2101 in the front decoration base 2103. And a front center decorative substrate 2104 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the front of the front decoration base 2103 and has a predetermined decoration, and is decorated with light by the front center decoration board 2104. And a guide path member 2106 for guiding a game ball received in the first start port 2002 downward, and a game ball mounted on the guide path member 2106 and received in the first start port 2002 is detected. A first starting port sensor 2107.

  The ball receiving member 2102 is formed in a container shape in which the upper part and the rear part are open, and can receive a game ball from above as the first starting port 2002 and guide it backward. The front decoration base 2103 extends evenly to the left and right around the ball receiving member 2102 (first starting port 2002), and is inclined such that the upper surface becomes lower toward both left and right ends. The front decoration member 2105 has a fake portion 2105a formed in a plate shape and having substantially the same size and shape as a lower large winning opening door member 2352 that opens and closes a lower large winning opening 2005 described later. ing. By the fake portion 2105a, it is possible to give an illusion to the player as if there is a special winning opening below the first starting opening 2002.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. 94 and the like. The side unit 2200 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001.

  The side unit 2200 is mounted on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and extends in a circular arc shape along the inner rail 1002. And two first ball receiving members 2202 projecting forward to form a general winning opening 2001, and a general winning opening attached to the front of the unit base 2201 to the left from the center in the left-right direction and projecting forward. A second ball receiving member 2203 forming 2001, a side decoration substrate 2204 disposed behind the unit base 2201 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and covering the side decoration substrate 2204 from behind. A substrate cover 2205 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2201.

  The unit base 2201 extends in an arc shape so as to be higher toward the left as viewed from the front. The unit base 2201 has a first shelf 2201a that is inclined so as to be lower rightward at a position on the left and above the position where the second ball receiving member 2203 is attached. And a protruding portion 2201b protruding from The unit base 2201 has a light-transmitting property, and is light-emitting decorated by the side decoration substrate 2204.

The first ball receiving member 2202 is formed in a container shape with the upper part and the rear part opened, and can receive a game ball from above as a general winning opening 2001 and guide it to the rear part.
The second ball receiving member 2203 is formed in a box shape having an open rear, and has a second shelf 2203a that is inclined to be lower rightward on the upper surface, and a second shelf 2203a below the second shelf 2203a. And a ball receiving portion 2203b that opens to the upper left on the side and forms a general winning opening 2001.

  The substrate cover 2205 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open front, and is opened upward at a portion behind the ball receiving portion 2203b of the two first ball receiving members 2202 and the second ball receiving member 2203. And has a gutter-shaped guiding portion 2205a that extends backward and forward and guides the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 backward.

  The side unit 2200 has the board cover 2205 inserted into the attachment port 1112 in a state where the board cover 2205 is attached to the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110). It can be guided behind the plate 1112.

[5-8c. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. 95 and the like. The attacker unit 2300 is disposed at the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2300 has one general winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a lower winning opening 2005. Specifically, a second starting port 2004 is disposed on the right side of the general winning opening 2001, and a gate unit 2003 is disposed immediately above the second starting opening 2004. Below the second starting port 2004, a lower winning port 2005 is arranged. The lower large winning opening 2005 extends left and right from just below the second starting opening 2004 to beyond left just below the general winning opening 2001 to the left.

  The attacker unit 2300 has a general winning opening 2001 and a gate portion 2003, and has a unit base 2301 attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front and a front base of the unit base 2301 and has a second starting opening 2004 in front of it. The starting port front member 2302 to be decorated, the shelf member 2303 attached to the front of the unit base 2301 between the starting port front member 2302 and the lower big winning opening 2005 and protruding forward, and the unit base 2301 A ball guiding member 2304 mounted on the rear side for guiding a game ball received by the second starting port 2004; a gate sensor 2305 mounted on the unit base 2301 for detecting the passage of the game ball through the gate portion 2003; , Is provided.

  Further, the attacker unit 2300 is disposed at a position corresponding to a position between the starter front member 2302 and the shelf member 2303 on the rear side of the unit base 2301 and has a lower attacker decorative board 2306 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. A board cover 2307 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301 so as to cover the back of the lower attacker decorative board 2306; and a lattice frame-shaped light shield attached between the lower attacker decorative board 2306 and the unit base 2301. (Not shown).

  The attacker unit 2300 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2301 and opens and closes the second starting port 2004. And a lower large winning opening unit 2350 that opens and closes.

  In the unit base 2301, the gate 2003 protrudes forward from the upper end, and one general winning opening 2001 protrudes forward from the lower left portion of the gate 2003 when viewed from the front. The unit base 2301 is provided with a gutter-like gutter portion 2301a for guiding a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 backward. This unit base 2301 has translucency.

  The starting port front member 2302 includes a pair of side walls 2302a (see FIG. 156 (a)) extending forward along both left and right sides of the second starting port 2004, and an upper end of the left side wall 2302a in front view. A guiding portion 2302b extending to the left and a flat outer wall portion 2302c extending forward from the right side wall portion 2302a in a front view with a distance allowing a game ball to pass therethrough; , A pair of side wall portions 2302a, a guiding portion 2302b, and a flat front plate portion 2302d connecting the front ends of the outer wall portions 2302c. The guiding portion 2302b has a left end extending leftward from the gate portion 2003.

  As shown in FIG. 156 (a) and the like, the shelf member 2303 has an upper surface extending from just below the right side wall portion 2302a of the starting opening front member 2302 to just below the left and right center of the general winning opening 2001 so that the left end becomes lower. ing. Thereby, when the lower game winning opening 2005 is in the open state, when the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the shelf member 2303 and is discharged from the left end, the game ball is accepted into the lower special winning opening 2005 with extremely high probability. The ball guiding member 2304 is attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 2307. In addition, the ball guiding member 2304 passes the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 through the second starting port unit 2320 and the lower large winning port unit 2350 behind the unit base 2301 to form a lower winning port. After being guided backward from the unit 2350, it is formed so as to be discharged downward.

  The second starting port unit 2320 includes a front case 2321 mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 2301 with a second starting port 2004 opened at the front end, and a rear case 2322 mounted on the rear side of the front case 2321. A second starting port door member 2323 supported in the front case 2321 so as to be able to protrude forward from the second starting port 2004 so as to be slidable forward and backward; A starting port solenoid 2324 mounted in the case 2322 and a second starting port sensor 2325 mounted to be sandwiched between the front case 2321 and the rear case 2322 and detecting a game ball received in the second starting port 2004. And

  When assembled to the attacker unit 2300, the second starting port unit 2320 has the front end of the front case 2321 penetrating the unit base 2301 from behind, and is located on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the unit case 2301. Thus, the second start port 2004 is opened forward. In a normal state where the starting port solenoid 2324 is not energized, the second starting port door member 2323 is immersed in the front case 2321, and the game ball flowing down in front of the second starting port 2004 is the second starting port. Without entering 2004, it flows down past the second starting port 2001. On the other hand, when the starting port solenoid 2324 is energized, the second starting port door member 2323 projects to the front from the second starting port 2004. In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the second start port 2004, the game ball contacts the second start port door member 2323, and the flowing direction changes from below to the rear, and the game ball enters the second start port 2004. Accepted. The game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is guided by the ball guiding member 2304 and discharged downward after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2325.

  The lower big winning opening unit 2350 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301 and has a rectangular lower winning opening 2005 extending left and right on the front surface, and a unit case 2351 and a lower case winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed. The lower winning opening door member 2352, which is a horizontally long rectangular flat plate and is rotatably attached to the 2351, and the lower winning opening door member 2352 which is mounted in the unit case 2351 and which is opened and closed according to the game state. Lower big winning opening solenoid 2353, lower big winning opening sensor 2354 attached to unit case 2351 and detecting a game ball received in lower big winning opening 2005, and attached to the lower surface of unit case 2351 and attached to the upper surface Lower winning award opening decorative board 2355 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and lower winning award opening solenoid 235 Includes inferior vena winning hole sensors 2354, starting opening the solenoid 2324, and a second start hole sensor 2325 or the like, the attacker unit relay board 2356 relaying the connection between the main control board, the.

  The lower college winning opening 2005 is open forward. The lower winning opening door 2352, which can open and close the lower winning opening 2005, is rotatably attached to the left and right ends of the lower side by a unit case 2351, and rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward. By doing so, the lower large winning opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state.

  In the lower special winning opening unit 2350, the lower special winning opening door member 2352 stands upright and the lower special winning opening 2005 is closed when the lower special winning opening solenoid 2353 is in a normal state in which power is not supplied. Then, when the lower large winning opening solenoid 2353 is energized according to the game state, the lower large winning opening door member 2352 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side is slightly higher than the lower side. It will be located. That is, the lower large winning opening door member 2352 is inclined so as to be higher from the lower side of the lower large winning opening 2005 toward the front.

  In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the lower winning a prize entrance 2005 and abuts on the lower winning prize opening door member 2352, the distribution direction changes from downward to backward due to the inclination of the lower winning prize opening door 2352, It will be accepted at the lower prize winning opening 2005. Then, the game balls received in the lower winning a prize port 2005 are discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2351 after being detected by the lower prize winning port sensor 2354.

[5-8d. Center role]
Next, the center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The center role item 2500 is disposed in the game area 5a, slightly above the starting port unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300, in the approximate center in front view, and attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center role 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the center liquid crystal display device 1500 disposed behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. The center role item 2500 has an upper winning prize opening 2006 that allows game balls to be accepted in accordance with a game state. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, a part of the lower part of the center accessory 2500 extends downward between the starting port unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300 to the vicinity of the lower right rail 1004. That is, the center role 2500 divides the game area 5a into right and left.

  The center role 2500 is a flat frame-shaped flange portion 2511 that comes into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 along the periphery of the mounting opening 1112 that is largely open at the center of the panel plate 1112, and protrudes forward from the flange portion 2511. A frame-shaped center base having a front peripheral wall portion 2512 for preventing game balls from entering the cage frame, and a rear peripheral wall portion 2513 protruding rearward from the flange portion 2511 and inserted into the mounting port 1112. 2510.

  The front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510 is formed over substantially the entire periphery of the flange portion 2511 except for a part of the lower side. The front peripheral wall portion 2512 is highest at a position slightly leftward from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side.

  In addition, the center role item 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 and the warp entrance 2520 in which the game ball in the game area 5a is open on the outer peripheral surface on the lower left side in the front view on the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510 so that the game ball can enter. Passage 2521 that guides the played game ball to the lower side near the left end in front view within the frame of the center base 2510, a warp exit 2523 that is open at the downstream end of the warp passage 2521 so that the game ball can pass, and a warp exit 2523 And a stage 2530 that is capable of rolling the game balls released from the base, extends right and left along the lower side within the frame of the center base 2510, and discharges the supplied game balls into the game area 5a. ing.

  The stage 2530 is curved so that both left and right ends are high and the left and right sides of a portion corresponding to the center in the left and right direction of the game area 5a are lowest, and swells so as to be slightly higher between the lowest portions. I have. The stage 2530 is formed at a position corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, and is formed at a center guiding groove 2531 cut away from the front end to the rear, and at two lowermost portions, respectively. And a fan-shaped side guide groove 2532 that lowers toward the right and spreads left and right. In a state in which the game board 5 is assembled, the first starting port 2002 is located immediately below the central guiding groove 2531, and the game balls discharged from the central guiding groove 2531 into the game area 5a have a very high probability of the first ball. It is received in the starting opening 2002.

  In addition, the center role item 2500 has an upper right entrance 2540 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 at the right end of the upper side in a front view and a center below the upper right entrance 2540. An upper game space 2541 having a predetermined size formed on the right side of the upper side of the base 2510 and having an upper winning prize opening 2006 on the left side in front view, and a center base 2510 from the right end in front view at the bottom of the upper game space 2541. A right passage 2542 that extends downward along the right side and has a lower end bent leftward and through which game balls can flow, a lower right exit 2543 that opens downward at the lower end of the right passage 2542, It has.

  The upper right entrance 2540 extends vertically with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the upper part is widened upward. The upper game space 2541 is formed to have a size that allows the game balls to move sufficiently in the vertical and horizontal directions. In the upper gaming space 2541, an upper winning prize opening 2006 is opened to the left of the upper right entrance 2540 in a front view. In addition, the upper game space 2541 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the right, and has an exit 2541b that opens upward at the right end of the bottom surface and communicates with the right passage 2542. Further, the upper gaming space 2541 has a guide portion 2541a that is inclined immediately below the upper right entrance 2540 so as to be lower rightward in front view. The guide portion 2541a causes the game ball that has fallen through the upper right entrance 2540 to roll linearly along the bottom surface of the upper game space 2541 without jumping up in the upper game space 2541, and the exit 2541b From the vehicle to the right passage 2542.

  The right passage 2542 is provided with a plurality of ridges 2542a extending left and right on the front and rear wall surfaces alternately in the vertical direction. Can be attenuated. The lower right exit 2543 opens right above the gate 2003 in the attacker unit 2300 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) also between the lower right exit 2543 and the gate portion 2003.

  In addition, the center role 2500 includes an upper winning opening door member 2550 that closes the upper winning opening 2006, and an upper winning opening solenoid 2551 that opens and closes the upper winning opening door member 2550 in accordance with a game state. The upper winning a prize mouth sensor 2552 for detecting a game ball received in the upper prize winning opening 2006, and a rear guide path 2553 for guiding the gaming sphere detected by the upper winning prize opening sensor 2552 to a rear side of the flange portion 2511 ( 156), a rear discharge port 2554 which is open at the rear end of the rear taxiway 2553 and through which a game ball can pass, and which branches off from the middle of the rear taxiway 2553 and is located on the right side of the center base 2510 in a front view. An escape passage 2555 that guides the game ball downward along therewith, and a discharge port 2556 that is open at the lower end of the escape passage are provided.

  The upper winning opening door member 2550 opens and closes the upper winning opening 2006 which is open to the left in front view from the upper right entrance 2540 in the upper gaming space 2541. The upper winning a prize entrance door member 2550 is attached to the lower end thereof to the left of the upper right entrance 2540 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward near the bottom surface of the upper gaming space 2541. Extends near the ceiling of the upper gaming space. The upper winning opening door member 2550 is upright in a normal state, and closes the upper winning opening 2006. Then, when power is supplied to the upper winning prize opening solenoid 2551 in accordance with the gaming state, the upper end rotates so as to move rightward in front view, and the upper winning prize opening 2006 is received so that a game ball can be received. Open. In this state, the upper end of the upper winning award opening door member 2550 is higher than the lower end and is located to the right of the upper right entrance 2540 in front view. Therefore, the game ball that has dropped to the upper winning a prize opening door member 2550 through the upper right entrance 2540 is guided by the upper prize winning opening door member 2550 and received in the upper winning prize opening 2006.

  The game ball received in the upper winning opening 2006 is detected by the upper winning opening sensor 2552 disposed at the lower left of the upper winning opening door member 2550, and thereafter is moved to the rear of the flange portion 2551 by the rear guide path 2553. Be guided. The rear discharge port 2554 which is open at the rear end of the rear guideway 2553 is usually formed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decorative surface 3310a of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 in the back right movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 described later. It is closed. Therefore, when the game ball is not discharged from the rear discharge port 2554, the game ball enters the escape passage 2555 branched just before the rear discharge port 2554, and is discharged downward from the discharge port 2556 through the release passage 2555. .

  In addition, the center role item 2500 includes a front movable effect unit 2560 attached to the upper side of the center base 2510 and a front movable effect unit 2570 attached to the lower side of the center base 2510. The top movable effector unit 2560 of the center role 2500 is mounted so as to be able to move up and down within the frame of the center base 2510, and is provided with a decoration according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1; A front movable decorative body decorative board (not shown) mounted on the rear side of the upper movable decorative body 2561 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face, and a game state mounted on the rear side of the center base 2510 And a top drive motor 2563 that raises and lowers the top movable decorative body 2561 according to.

  The front and bottom movable effecting unit 2570 is attached to a portion extending below the stage 2530 on the lower side of the center base 2510, and is a flat, translucent table with a decoration on the front surface. After the lower decorative body 2571, the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574, which are rotatably mounted in front of the front and lower decorative bodies 2571, and after the center base 2510. And a rear drive motor 2575 for rotating the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574 in accordance with a gaming state, and a rear side of the front and lower decorative body 2571. And a front and bottom movable decorative body decoration board 2576 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  In the front and rear movable rendering unit 2570, the first rotating decorative body 2572, the second rotating decorative body 2573, and the third rotating decorative body 2574 are formed in a shape imitating a shuriken. , Rotate in the same direction.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from the back. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100. In addition, a central liquid crystal display device 1500 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with a front opening and a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the liquid crystal display device 1500, and a game ball attached near the lower left front end of the back box 3010 and guided to the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 by guiding the game ball downward to the substrate. A lower left ball passage unit 3030 discharging onto the holder 1200 and a game ball attached to the lower right side front end of the back box 3010 and received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 and received in the upper winning opening 2006. An outlet 3303a of the lower right back base 3303 in the rear right and left movable rendering unit 3300 described later. A lower right ball passage unit 3040 for guiding the game balls discharged from the ball and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 2556 of the escape passage 2555 of the center role 2500 downward and discharging them onto the substrate holder 1200, and a lower left ball passage A general winning opening sensor 3050 that is attached to the unit 3030 and the lower right ball passage unit 3040, respectively, and detects a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001.

  The back unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 to the left of the opening 3010a as viewed from the rear, and drives a decorative board based on a control command from a peripheral control board. A lamp driving board cover 3061 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear of the board 3060, and a control command from the peripheral control board attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a in rear view. A motor drive board 3062 for driving each drive motor based on the motor drive board, a motor drive board cover 3063 attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear of the motor drive board 3062, and a rear view of the back face of the back box 3010. It is installed in the lower left corner and relays the connection between the main control board and each winning opening sensor, each winning opening solenoid, etc. That the panel relay board 3064, and a.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back peripheral decoration unit 3080 attached along the upper side and the left side at the front end of the back box 3010, and a back upper movable effect unit mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. 3100, a lower back front movable effect unit 3200 attached below the opening 3010 a near the front end in the back box 3010, and a back right movable effect attached to the right side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The unit 3300, the back left movable production unit 3400 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the rear production unit 3200 installed below the opening 3010a and in the back box 3010 in the back box 3010. The back-to-back movable production unit 3500, the back-to-back movable production unit 3100 and the back-to-back movable in the back box 3010 A back corners movable direction unit 3600 attached to the respective left and right sides of the output unit 3500, and a.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The back box 3010 has a box-like shape with an open front, and an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and a frame-like liquid crystal mounting projecting rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a in a flat plate shape. A rear portion of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside to the outside on the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in the rear view and into which the left fixing piece 1501 of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is inserted. And a notch portion 3010d cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center of the left side in the vertical direction.

  The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the central liquid crystal display device 1500 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the rear surface of the cutout portion 3010d so as to be slidable up and down.

  Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

  Although a detailed description of the back box 3010 is omitted, bosses and mounting holes for mounting the movable effect units and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Lower left ball passage unit]
Next, the lower left ball passage unit 3030 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The lower left ball passage unit 3030 is attached to a portion corresponding to the rear of the side unit 2200 in the back box 3010. The lower left ball passage unit 3030 is formed in an L-shape in which a side extending vertically when viewed from the front is shorter than a side extending left and right, and the inside is hollow. The lower left ball passage unit 3030 has three entrances 3031 that open frontward on the front surface and through which game balls can pass. These three entrances 3031 are formed at positions corresponding to the three guiding portions 2205a in the side unit 2200.

  In the lower left ball passage unit 3030, the hollow interior is inclined so as to become lower rightward when viewed from the front, and the game balls entering from the three entrances 3031 are discharged downward near the right end of the lower surface. You. A general winning opening sensor 3050 is attached to the lower left ball passage unit 3030, and a game ball that has entered the inside from the entrance 3031 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050. That is, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050 attached to the lower left ball passage unit 3030.

[5-9c. Lower right ball passage unit]
Next, the lower right ball passage unit 3040 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The lower right ball passage unit 3040 is attached to a portion of the back box 3010 corresponding to the rear of the attacker unit 2300. The lower right ball passage unit 3040 is opened forward and has a first entrance 3041 through which a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 can enter, and a back right movable rendering unit 3300 described later. A second entrance 3042 opening upward just below a discharge opening 3303a opening on the lower surface of the lower surface of the first opening, and a center opening upward and rightward and upward in a front view of the second entrance 3042. A third entrance 3043 through which the game ball discharged from the outlet 2556 through the escape passage 2555 of the accessory 2500 can enter.

  The lower right ball passage unit 3040 discharges the game balls that have entered the first entrance 3041, the second entrance 3042, and the third entrance 3043 downward through independent paths. The lower right ball passage unit 3040 is provided with a general winning opening sensor 3050 that detects a game ball that has entered the first entrance 3041. That is, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050 attached to the lower right ball passage unit 3040.

[5-9d. Back peripheral decoration unit]
Next, the back peripheral decoration unit 3080 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The back peripheral decoration unit 3080 is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front end of the back box 3010 at a position corresponding to the upper side, the left side, and the lower left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a. The rear peripheral decoration unit 3080 is attached to the rear peripheral decorative member 3081 extending in a C-shape and having translucency and a rear peripheral decorative member 3081. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. And a substrate cover 3083 that covers the back of the rear peripheral decorative substrate 3082 and is attached to the rear side of the rear peripheral decorative member 3081.

  The back peripheral decoration unit 3080 can make the back peripheral decoration member 3081 emit light by appropriately lighting the LED of the back peripheral decoration substrate 3082. Further, in a state where the game board 5 is assembled, the front surface of the back peripheral decoration member 3081 can be seen from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1110, and the outside of the center role item 2500 in the game area 5a is decorated.

[5-9e. Movable production unit on back
Next, the back upper movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 102 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 102 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper decorative body unit of the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 106 is an exploded view of the back upper decorative body unit of the rear upper movable effect unit from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which was seen. Further, FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the upper back sub-decorative body in the upper back movable decorative body unit. FIG. 108 is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism when the back upper decorative unit of the back upper movable effect unit is at the retracted position. FIG. FIG. 110 is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism at the appearance position, and FIG. 110 is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism when the back upper decorative body unit of the back upper movable effect unit is at the second appearance position.

  FIG. 111 (a) is a front view showing a part of the internal mechanism of the back upper movable effect unit, and FIG. 111 (b) is a perspective view of a part of the internal mechanism different from (a) viewed from the front. , (C) is a perspective view of (b) viewed from behind. Further, FIG. 112 is an explanatory view showing the movement of a part of the internal mechanism of the rear upper movable effect unit. FIG. 113 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state of main members constituting the internal mechanism at the retracted position, and FIG. 113 (b) shows a state in which the first transmission member rotates from the state of FIG. FIG. 114C is a diagram illustrating a state in which transmission of rotation to the transmitted member has been started. FIG. 114C illustrates a state in which the first transmitted member is further rotated together with the first transmitted member from the state illustrated in FIG. 113B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the upper decorative body unit is descending from the retreat position toward the first appearance position, and (d) shows that the first transmitted member rotates further together with the first transmitting member from the state of (c). It is an explanatory view showing the state where transmission of rotation to the first transmitted member was completed, and the back upper decorative body unit reached the first appearance position.

  Further, FIG. 115 (e) shows that the second transmission member of the transmission mechanism which has been rotated together with the first transmission member from the state of FIG. 114 (d) further rotates, and the transmission of the rotation to the second transmitted member is stopped. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which started, and (f) is a 2nd transmission member rotates with a 2nd transmission member from the state of (e), and a back decoration object unit moves from a 1st appearance position to a 2nd appearance position. FIG. 116 (g) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the second transmission member rotates together with the second transmission member from the state shown in FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the state where the body unit is rotating while further descending toward the second appearance position, and (h) is a state where the second transmitted member and the second transmitted member further rotate together with the second transmitting member from the state of (g). The transmission of the rotation to the second transmitted member ends, and the back upper decorative body unit is in the first appearance position. While descending from the state is an explanatory view showing a state that has reached the second occurrence position by half turn.

  The upper back movable rendering unit 3100 is mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The rear upper movable effecting unit 3100 is mounted in the back box 3010 and extends left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 3101 to form a space between the unit base 3101 and the unit base 3101. A rear cover 3102, a rear upper drive motor 3103 attached to the front surface near the right end of the unit base 3101 when viewed from the front, and having a rotation axis protruding between the unit base 3101 and the rear cover 3102 through the unit base 3101; , Is provided.

  In addition, the back upper movable rendering unit 3100 includes a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3104 fixed to the rotation shaft of the back upper drive motor 3103, and a spur gear-shaped first large-diameter gear 3105a meshed with the drive gear 3104. And a first small-diameter gear 3105b that is smaller in diameter than the first large-diameter gear 3105a and that rotates integrally with the first large-diameter gear 3105a on the rear side of the first large-diameter gear 3105a. The first driven gear 3105 disposed on the other side, and a smaller diameter than the second large diameter gear 3106a and the second large diameter gear 3106a in the form of a spur gear meshing with the first small diameter gear 3105b of the first driven gear 3105 And a second small-diameter gear 3106b that rotates integrally with the second large-diameter gear 3106a in front of the second large-diameter gear 3106a, and is disposed on the left side of the first driven gear 3105 in a front view. It has a second driven gear 3106 and a first transmission gear 3107a in the form of a spur gear meshing with the second small-diameter gear 3106b of the second driven gear 3106, and is disposed to the left of the second driven gear 3106 in a front view. A first transmission member 3107, and a second transmission gear 3108a in the form of a spur gear meshing with the first transmission gear 3107a of the first transmission member 3107, and are disposed on the left side of the first transmission member 3107 in a front view. And a second transmission member 3108 (see FIG. 111A).

  The first driven gear 3105, the second driven gear 3106, the first transmission member 3107, and the second transmission member 3108 are rotatable between the unit base 3101 and the rear cover 3102 by the unit base 3101 and the rear cover 3102. Installed.

  The first transmission member 3107 includes a cylindrical first transmission pin 3107b protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the front surface of the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3107a in parallel with the rotation axis, and a revolution of the first transmission pin 3107b. A disc-shaped first lock projection 3107c projecting concentrically forward from the front surface of the first transmission gear 3107a with a radius smaller than the radius, and a portion between the first lock projection 3107c and the first transmission pin 3107b, From a uniform range on both sides of an axis connecting the center of the first transmission gear 3107a and the center of the first transmission pin 3107b on the outer peripheral surface of the first lock projection 3107c, toward the center of the first lock projection 3107c. And a first notch 3107d cut out in a fan shape.

  The second transmission member 3108 has a cylindrical second transmission pin 3108b protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge in front of the spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3108a in parallel with the rotation axis, and the revolving motion of the second transmission pin 3108b. A disc-shaped second lock projection 3108c projecting concentrically forward from the front surface of the second transmission gear 3108a with a radius smaller than the radius, and between the second lock projection 3108c and the second transmission pin 3108b, From an even range on both sides of an axis connecting the center of the second transmission gear 3108a and the center of the second transmission pin 3108b on the outer peripheral surface of the second lock projection 3108c, toward the center of the second lock projection 3108c. And a second cutout 3108d cut out in a fan shape.

  The first transmission gear 3107a and the second transmission gear 3108a of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 have the same diameter. The first transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3108b of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 have the same cylindrical diameter and the same orbital radius. The first lock projection 3107c and the second lock projection 3108c of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 have the same diameter. Further, the first notch 3107d and the second notch 3108d of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are formed at an angle of 72 degrees with respect to the circumference of the first lock projection 3107c and the second lock projection 3108c. It is formed in a fan shape in the angle range.

  Furthermore, the rear upper movable effecting unit 3100 has a columnar slide shaft 3109 having a lower end attached to the unit base 3101 at the front surface near the left end in front view of the unit base 3101 and extending vertically, and an upper end of the slide shaft 3109. A shaft mounting member 3110 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3101; a left slider 3111 having a flat detection piece 3111a mounted slidably up and down by a slide shaft 3109 and extending rearward; A back-up / down detection sensor 3112 which is attached to the unit base 3101 by detecting the detection piece 3111a of the left slider 3111, and an upper part is attached to the front of the unit base 3101 on the left side in front view of the back upper drive motor 3103. , Lower end is unit base 310 A rail bracket 3113 extending up and down so as to protrude downward from the lower surface of the slide rail; A rack member 3115 attached to a right slider 3114a of a rail 3114 and having a rack gear 3115a extending vertically, and a first movable plate having left and right ends attached to a left slider 3111 and a rack member 3115, respectively. And a base 3116.

  In addition, the back upper movable rendering unit 3100 includes a flat first substrate portion 3117a formed in a droplet shape, and a cylindrical first substrate portion 3117a having a columnar first projection protruding forward from the tip of the droplet shape. It has a working pin 3117b, and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3101 so that the first working pin 3117b revolves at a position on the front surface of the unit base 3101 on the right side of the first transmission member 3107 when viewed from the front. A first transmitted member 3117 capable of transmitting the rotation of the first transmitting member 3107, and a first bearing slit 3118a into which the first working pin 3117b of the first transmitted member 3117 is slidably inserted in the left-right direction. And a bearing member 3118 attached to the rear surface of the first movable base 3116.

  The first movable base 3116 has an opening 3116a penetrating back and forth and extending from the lower end to near the center in the vertical direction. On the rear surface of the first movable base 3116, a rack member 3115 is mounted to the right of the opening 3116a in a front view. The rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115 extends along the opening 3116a with the tip of the rack member facing leftward in front view.

  The first movable base 3116 is slidably moved up and down (movable up and down) by a slide shaft 3109 and a slide rail 3114 via a left slider 3111 and a right slider 3114a. Further, the position of the first movable base 3116 in the vertical direction is regulated by the first working pin 3117b of the first transmitted member 3117 inserted into the first bearing slit 3118a of the bearing member 3118. Accordingly, when the first transmitted member 3117 is rotated to revolve the first working pin 3117b to change the vertical position of the first working pin 3117b, the first working pin 3117b moves through the first bearing slit 3118a. While sliding in the left-right direction, the first movable base 3116 slides in the vertical direction. That is, when the first transmitted member 3117 is rotated, the first movable base 3116 slides up and down.

  The first substrate portion 3117a of the first driven member 3117 has a base circle whose front view shape is substantially the same as the diameter of the gear teeth of the second large-diameter gear 3106a of the second driven gear 3106, and a base circle thereof. And two sides extending so as to be in contact with each other from outside. The first driven member 3117 has a center of rotation of the base circle in the first base portion 3117a as a center of rotation, and the center of rotation is coaxial with the center of the second driven gear 3106. The first working pin 3117b protrudes from the vicinity of the intersection of two sides in contact with the base circle of the first substrate portion 3117a (flow-drop-shaped tip).

  The first transmitted member 3117 has the same diameter as the base circle of the first substrate portion 3117a and has a cylindrical first transmitted main body portion 3117c projecting rearward from the rear surface of the first substrate portion 3117a; A first transmission slit 3117d recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 3117c toward the center and into which the first transmission pin 3107b is slidably inserted, and a first transmission slit 3117d on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body 3117c. And a pair of first lock recesses 3117e that are recessed in an arc from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  The first lock recess 3117e is recessed by an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the first lock protrusion 3107c of the first transmission member 3107. The pair of first lock recesses 3117e are formed such that lines connecting the centers of the respective concave arcs and the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3117 cross at an angle of 90 degrees.

  This first transmitted member 3117 is In the state where the back upper movable production unit 3100 is assembled, The first transmitted main body 3117c is A first transmission pin 3107b and a first lock projection 3107c of the first transmission member 3107; The position in the front-back direction is the same. This allows The first transmission pin 3107b can be inserted into the first transmission slit 3117d, Rotation can be transmitted through the first transmission pin 3170b and the first transmission slit 3117d. Also, A part of the first lock projection 3107c can be inserted into the first lock recess 3117e, By inserting a part of the first lock projection 3107c into the first lock recess 3117e, The rotation of the first transmitted member 3117 can be restricted (locked).

  In addition, the upper back movable rendering unit 3100 has a second bearing slit 3119a penetrating front and rear and extending left and right at an upper end portion, and a bearing hole 3119b penetrating front and rear at substantially the center in the vertical direction. The second movable base 3119 is vertically slidably mounted on the rear surface of the first movable base 3116 so that the bearing hole 3119b faces forward from the opening 3116a, and is disposed in front of the first movable base 3116. A back-side decorative body having a shaft portion 3151a rotatably inserted into a bearing hole 3119a of the second movable base 3119 and imitating a head including a face of a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. Unit 3150 and a rear end of the shaft 3151a of the upper back decoration unit 3150 penetrating the second movable base 3119. A spur gear-shaped decorative body rotating gear 3120 meshing with the rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115, and a flat gear mounted on the rear surface of the second movable base 3119 so as to cover the rear of the decorative body rotating gear 3120. And a cover 3121.

  When the second movable base 3119 is slid relatively to the first movable base 3116, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 attached to the bearing hole 3119b of the second movable base 3119 is together with the second movable base 3119. Slide to. At this time, the decorative body rotating gear 3120 mounted on the shaft 3151a of the back upper decorative body unit 3150 meshes with the rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115 mounted on the first movable base 3116. When the two movable bases 3119 slide, the decorative body rotating gear 3120 rotates together with the back upper decorative body unit 3150.

  Further, the back upper movable effecting unit 3100 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3101 below the front view second transmitting member 3108 and in front of the unit base 3101 so that the rotation of the second transmitting member 3108 can be transmitted. A second transmitted member 3122, a rotating link member 3123 attached slidably on the front surface of the second transmitted member 3122 in a direction along the rotation surface, and a second transmitted member on the front surface of the rotating link member 3123. It is slidably mounted in a direction intersecting the sliding direction with respect to 3122, and is rotatably mounted behind the first movable base 3116, and projects rearward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center. A cylindrical second working pin 312 slidably inserted into the second bearing slit 3119a of the second movable base 3119. Includes a second movable base driving member 3124 to have a, a shaft member 3125 are rotatably mounted relative to the second movable base driving member 3124 first movable base 3116, a.

  The second transmitted member 3122 includes a disk-shaped second substrate portion 3122a rotatably attached to the unit base 3101, and a cylindrical second transmitted main body portion 3122b protruding rearward from a peripheral edge of the second substrate portion 3122a. A second transmission slit 3122c which is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body 3122b toward the center and into which the second transmission pin 3108b is slidably inserted, and an outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body 3122b On both sides of the second transmission slit 3122c, a pair of second lock recesses 3122d recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center, and a pair of second lock recesses 3122d recessed rearward from the front surface of the second substrate portion 3122a and with respect to the rotation axis. And a groove-shaped first transmission guide portion 3122e extending at a right angle and having one end opening to the outer peripheral surface of the second substrate portion 3122a. (See, etc. FIG. 111 (b) and (c)).

  In the second transmitted member 3122, the radius of the second substrate portion 3122a (the second transmitted main body portion 3122b) is shorter than the distance from the rotation center to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108, and the second lock projection is formed. It is formed longer than the distance to the outer peripheral surface of 3108c. The second lock recess 3122d is recessed by an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the second lock protrusion 3108c of the second transmission member 3108. The pair of second lock recesses 3122d is formed such that lines connecting the centers of the respective concave arcs and the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  The first guide transmission portion 3122e extends at an angle of 54 degrees with respect to the direction in which the second transmission slit 3122c extends. In addition, the first guide transmission portion 3122e opens on the peripheral surface in a direction opposite to the direction in which the second transmission slit 3122c opens on the peripheral surface.

  The rotating link member 3123 has a flat link body 3123a and a flat plate protruding from the rear surface of the link body 3123a and slidably inserted into the first transmission guide 3122e of the second transmitted member 3122. A pair of first transmitted guide portions 3123b, a front protruding portion 3123c protruding from the front surface of the link main body portion 3123a, and a first transmitted guide portion 3123b that is recessed rearward from the front surface of the front protruding portion 3123c and extends. 111b (FIG. 111 (b) and (b)), which extends in a direction intersecting the direction in which the front projection 3123c extends. c) etc.).

  The pair of first transmitted guide portions 3123b of the rotary link member 3123 are provided symmetrically with respect to an axis passing through the center of the link main body 3123a, and are provided eccentrically from the center. The second transmission guide 3123c is provided on an axis passing through the center of the link main body 3123a. The first transmitted guide portion 3123b and the second transmitted guide portion 3123c each extend in a direction intersecting at an angle of 95 degrees.

  The second movable base driving member 3124 protrudes rearward from a position where the second action pin 3124a is eccentric with respect to the center of rotation, and includes a driving main body 3124b rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116; A second transmitted guide portion that projects rearward from the rear surface of the portion 3124b, passes through the center of rotation, and extends perpendicular to the rotation axis, and is slidably inserted into the second transmission guide portion 3123d of the rotary link member 3123. 3124c (see FIGS. 111B and 111C).

  As shown in FIG. 105 and FIG. 106, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 includes a decorative body base 3151 having a flat plate-shaped shaft portion 3151a protruding from the center of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape, and a decorative body base 3151. Attached to the front of the body 3152, which is three-dimensionally imitating the head of a predetermined character and has two elliptical openings 3152a. And a C-shaped upper back decoration board 3153 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front side.

  Further, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is disposed substantially at the center of the front surface of the decorative body base 3151 behind the back upper decorative body 3152, and has a cylindrical guide shaft 3154 extending left and right, and both ends of the guide shaft 3154. A pair of shaft brackets 3155 attached to the front surface of the decorative body base 3151 and a guide shaft 3154 are attached so as to be able to guide left and right, and have a guide slit 3156a extending vertically at the lower center in the left-right direction. A flat sub-decorative body slider 3156 and a pair of sub-decorative body sliders 3156, which are attached to the front surface of the sub-decorative body slider 3156, close the pair of openings 3152a of the upper back decoration 3152, and have an elliptical shape at a portion facing the opening 3152a. The sub-decoration body 3157 provided with the sub-decoration 3157a of FIG. Includes a backing on a secondary decorative substrate 3158 in which a plurality of LED on the front is attached to the front surface of the decorative body slider 3156 is mounted, the.

  Further, the upper back decoration unit 3150 is attached to the back upper sub-drive motor 3159 and the rotation shaft of the back upper sub-drive motor 3159 near the lower end of the front surface of the decoration base 3151 so that the rotation axis extends left and right. A worm gear 3160, a disc-shaped main body 3161 a rotatably mounted on the decorative body base 3151 above the worm gear 3160, and extending along the outer peripheral surface of the main body 3161 a and meshing with the worm gear 3160. Gear 3161b, an extension piece 3161c extending rearward of the sub-decoration body slider 3156 from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 3161a on the opposite side to the gear part 3161b, and protruding forward from the tip of the extension piece 3161c. It is slidably inserted into guide slit 3156a of sub decorative body slider 3156. Columnar slide pin 3161D, a gear member 3161 that has a, and a.

  In the upper back decoration unit 3150, the two openings 3152a of the upper back decoration 3152 form the outer periphery of the eyes of a predetermined character, and the back upper decoration body 3157 facing forward from the two openings 3152a. The decoration 3157a forms the pupil. The back upper decorative body 3152 and the back upper decorative body 3157 have a light-transmitting property, and are illuminated and decorated by the LEDs of the back upper decorative board 3153 and the back upper decorative board 3158 that are arranged behind them. .

  As shown in the drawing, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is in a state where the head of a predetermined character simulated by the upper back decorative body 3152 is turned upside down in a normal state. In addition, the upper back decoration unit 3150 can slide the upper back decoration 3157 to the left and right with respect to the upper back decoration 3152 by the rotational driving of the upper back drive motor 3159. Thereby, a movable effect in which the pupil (sub-decoration 3157a) of the predetermined character simulated by the back upper decorative body 3152 is left and right can be performed.

  Next, the operation of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. First, the operation of the upper back decoration 3157 in the upper back decoration unit 3150 will be described. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), in a normal state, the extension piece 3161c of the gear member 3161 is attached in a state of extending vertically upward. In this state, the slider 3156 for sub-decorative body is located substantially at the center of the sliding range extending in the left and right direction, and the two sub The decorations 3157a are respectively located at substantially the centers in the two openings 3152a of the upper back decoration 3152. That is, in a normal state, a predetermined character simulated by the upper back decoration 3152 is looking at the front.

  In this normal state, for example, when the worm gear 3160 is rotated clockwise in the right side view by the back upper sub-drive motor 3159, the gear member 3161b meshed with the worm gear 3160 causes the gear member 3161 to be opposed to the front view. It rotates clockwise and revolves so that the sliding pin 3161d located above the center of rotation moves to the left. Due to the revolving movement of the sliding pin 3161d to the left, the sliding pin 3161d slides downward in the guide slit 3156a, and the sliding pin 3161d presses the inner surface of the guide slit 3156a to the left. The body slider 3156 slides to the left. As a result, the sub-decoration 3157a moves to the left, so that the predetermined character simulated by the upper back decoration 3152 is looking to the left (see FIG. 107 (b)).

  On the other hand, when the worm gear 3160 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view by the back upper sub-drive motor 3159, the gear member 3161 rotates in the clockwise direction in front view by the gear portion 3161b meshing with the worm gear 3160. Then, the sliding pin 3161d located above the rotation center revolves to move rightward. Due to the revolving movement of the sliding pin 3161d rightward, the sliding pin 3161d slides downward in the guide slit 3156a, and the sliding pin 3161d presses the inner surface of the guide slit 3156a rightward, so that the sub decoration is formed. The body slider 3156 slides to the right. As a result, the sub-decoration 3157a moves rightward, so that the predetermined character simulated by the upper back decoration 3152 is looking rightward (see FIG. 107 (c)).

  In this manner, the sub decoration 3157a can be moved right and left by the rotation of the rear upper driving motor 3159, so that a predetermined character simulated by the rear decoration 3152 can be seen depending on the game state. It is possible to perform a movable effect in which the direction in which the user changes is changed. In addition, by moving the sub-decoration 3157a back and forth to the left and right, it is also possible to perform a moving effect of swaying the eyes of a predetermined character simulated by the upper back decoration 3152, and present a variety of moving effects to the player. can do.

  Subsequently, the lifting operation of the back upper decorative body unit 3150 in the back upper movable effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. The back upper movable effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment can raise and lower the back upper decorative body unit 3150 and rotate the back upper decorative body unit 3150 by 180 degrees.

  First, the internal mechanism of the upper back movable effect unit 3100 for lifting and lowering the upper back decoration unit 3150 will be described. As shown in FIG. 108, FIG. 111, and the like, a back-upper drive motor 3103 having a rotating shaft directed in the front-rear direction is disposed at the right end in front view. The center of rotation of the first driven gear 3105 that meshes with the drive gear 3104 attached to the rotation shaft of the upper back drive motor 3103 is disposed at the lower left in front view with respect to the center of rotation of the drive gear 3104. The rotation center of the second driven gear 3106 meshing with the first driven gear 3105 is disposed at the upper left of the rotation center of the first driven gear 3105 in a front view and substantially at the same height as the rotation center of the driving gear 3104. I have. Further, the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107 having the first transmission gear 3107a meshed with the second driven gear 3106 is lower than the rotation center of the second driven gear 3106 at the lower left in front view, and the rotation of the first driven gear 3105 It is located at approximately the same height as the center. Furthermore, the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108 having the second transmission gear 3108a meshing with the first transmission gear 3107a of the first transmission member 3107 is located at the upper left of the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107 in front view, It is arranged at a position higher than the rotation center of the second driven gear 3106.

  The rotation center of the first transmitted member 3117 to which the rotation from the first transmission member 3106 is transmitted is at the upper right of the rotation center of the first transmission member 3106 in a front view, and is coaxial with the second driven gear 3106. Is located in the position. On the other hand, the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122 to which the rotation from the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted is slightly leftward from directly below the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108 when viewed from the front, and the rotation center of the second transmission member 3107 is It is arranged at a position lower than the rotation center. The rotation center of the second movable base driving member 3124 to which the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is transmitted is arranged on an axis vertically extending vertically passing through the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122.

  In the normal state, the upper back decoration unit 3150 is located at the rising end in the vertical up and down range, and the top and bottom of the predetermined character simulated by the upper back decoration 3152 is reversed. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 83 and the like, most of the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is located behind the center role 2500, and only a small part of the frame is the center role 2500. It can be visually recognized from the player side through the inside. That is, in the normal state, the upper back decoration unit 3150 is located at the evacuation position where it is hardly visible from the player side.

  When the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is in the retracted position, the first transmission pin 3107b of the first transmission member 3107 is in front of the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107, as shown in FIGS. It is located at the upper left of the view (a position inclined about 27 degrees to the left from the vertical line), and the second transmission pin 3108b of the second transmission member 3108 is located at the upper right of the front view with respect to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108 ( (A position inclined about 13 degrees to the right from the vertical line). In the retracted position, the first working pin 3117b of the first transmitted member 3117 is at the upper left (in a position inclined about 45 degrees leftward from the vertical line) with respect to the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3117. ), And the first transmission slit 3117d of the first transmitted member 3117 has a smaller angle with respect to the horizontal than the axis connecting the first working pin 3117b from the rotation center (about 72 degrees with respect to the vertical line). (Angle of degree) and extends toward the upper left in front view.

  In the retracted position, the second transmission slit 3122c of the second transmitted member 3122 extends from the rotation center toward the upper left in front view (approximately 36 degrees leftward from the vertical line). The second movable base driving member 3124 has a rotation center located above the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122 and slightly below the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108, and has a second action. The pin 3124a is located at the upper right in front view (position inclined approximately 45 degrees rightward from the vertical line) with respect to the rotation center of the second movable base driving member 3124.

  Further, when in the retracted position, the first lock projection 3107c of the first transmission member 3107 is inserted into the first lock recess 3117e of one of the first transmitted members 3117 (closer to the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107). ing. Thus, since the rotation of the first transmitted member 3117 is restricted (locked), the first movable base 3116 does not slide up and down. Also, the second lock projection 3108c of the second transmission member 3108 is inserted into one of the second transmitted members 3122 (closer to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108) in the second lock recess 3122d. Thus, since the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is restricted (locked), the second movable base driving member 3124 does not rotate, and the second movable base 3119 does not slide up and down.

  Further, when the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is in the retracted position, the detection piece 3111a of the left slider 3111 on which the first movable base 3116 is slidable up and down is detected by the back up / down detection sensor 3112.

  When the back upper drive unit 3150 rotates the drive gear 3104 in the counterclockwise direction in front view with the back upper drive motor 3103 in the retracted position, the first driven gear 3105 and the second driven gear 3105 The first transmission member 3107 rotates in the clockwise direction and the second transmission member 3108 rotates in the counterclockwise direction via the two driven gears 3106 at the same speed. Then, first, the first transmission pin 3107d of the first transmission member 3107 starts to enter the first transmission slit 3117d of the first transmitted member 3117 (see FIG. 113 (b)).

  When the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the first transmission member 3107 is further rotated in the clockwise direction, the first notch 3107d is rotated to the position of the first lock recess 3117e. The first lock projection 3107c is removed from the inside of the first lock recess 3117e, and the first transmission pin 3107b contacts the inner surface of the first transmission slit 3117d to press the first transmission slit 3117d downward. Accordingly, the rotation of the first transmission member 3107 is transmitted to the first transmitted member 3117, and the first transmitted member 3117 rotates in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front. At this time, the first notch 3107d is located at the position of the first lock recess 3117e, and the first lock projection 3107c is released from the inside of the first lock recess 3117e (lock is released). Therefore, the first transmitted member 3117 rotates without being prevented from rotating by the first lock projection 3107c (see FIG. 114 (c)).

  By rotating the first transmitted member 3117 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the first working pin 3117b revolves downward and the first working pin 3117b is slidably inserted. The first movable base 3116 slides downward through the one bearing slit 3118a. Since the upper back decoration unit 3150 is attached to the first movable base 3116 via the second movable base 3119, the back upper decoration unit 3105 slides downward together with the first movable base 3116.

  When the first movable base 3116 slides downward, the second transmission guide 3123d of the rotary link member 3123 extends vertically, so that the second transmission guide 3123d is attached to the first movable base 3116 and the second transmission guide 3123d. The second movable base driving member 3214 having the second transmitted guide portion 3124c guided by the first movable base 3116 can move downward together with the first movable base 3116, and the first movable base 3116 slides smoothly.

  When the driving gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the first transmission member 3107 is further rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front, the first transmission pin 3107b is disengaged from the first transmission slit 3117d, and The lock projection 3107c enters another first lock recess 3117e different from the first lock recess 3117e into which the first lock projection 3107c was originally inserted. As a result, the rotation of the first transmitted member 3117 stops, and the downward sliding of the first movable base 3116 stops (see FIGS. 109 and 114 (d)). In this state, the first movable base 3116 is located at the lower end of the elevating range, and the upper decorative body unit 3150 is located at the first appearance position. In the first transmission member 3107, the rotation range in which the first transmission pin 3107b is inserted into the first transmission slit 3117d of the first transmitted member 3117 is the first specific rotation range.

  In the state where the upper back decoration unit 3150 is in the first appearance position, the upper and lower sides of the back upper decoration body 3152 are approximately half as shown in FIG. , Faces the player from within the frame of the center role 2500. In the first appearance position, the pair of openings 3152a of the upper back decoration 3152 and the sub-decoration 3157a facing the inside of the opening 3152a can be partially visually recognized from the player side. Thereby, it is possible to present a movable effect as if a predetermined character simulated by the back upper decorative body 3152 is looking upside down from above.

  In the state where the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is in the first appearance position, the second transmission pin 3108b of the second transmission member 3108 rotating together with the first transmission member 3107 is moved by the second transmission pin 3108 of the second transmitted member 3122. It has not reached the slit 3122c. Further, the rotation center of the second movable base driving member 3124 attached to the first movable base 3116 is located below the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122, and the second rotation of the rotation link member 3123. Only the upper portion of the second transmitted guide portion 3124c of the second movable base driving member 3124 is guided by the transmission guide portion 3123d.

  From the state where the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is in the first appearance position, the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the first transmission member 3107 is further rotated in the clockwise direction, and the second transmission member 3108 is further rotated. Is further rotated counterclockwise in front view, the first transmission pin 3107b moves away from the first transmission slit 3117d, and the second transmission pin 3108b enters the second transmission slit 3122c of the second transmitted member 3122. (See FIG. 115 (e)).

  When the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the second transmission member 3108 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the second notch 3108d is rotated to the position of the second lock recess 3122d. The second lock projection 3108c is removed from the inside of the second lock recess 3122d, and the second transmission pin 3108b contacts the inner surface of the second transmission slit 3122c to press the second transmission slit 3122c rightward in front view. Accordingly, the rotation of the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted to the second transmitted member 3122, and the second transmitted member 3122 rotates clockwise in front view. At this time, the second notch 3108d is located at the position of the second lock recess 3122d, and the second lock protrusion 3108c is released from the inside of the second lock recess 3122d (lock is released). Therefore, the second transmitted member 3122 rotates without being prevented from rotating by the second lock projection 3108c (see FIG. 115 (f)).

  When the second transmitted member 3122 rotates clockwise in a front view, the first transmitted guide portion 3122e formed on the front surface of the second transmitted member 3122 also rotates. The rotary link member 3123 having the first transmitted guide portion 3123b that is slidably guided also tries to rotate in the same clockwise direction. On the other hand, the upper part of the second transmitted guide portion 3124c of the second movable base driving member 3124, which is rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116, slides on the second transmission guide portion 3123d on the front surface of the rotary link member 3123. Guided as possible. Thus, when the rotation link member 3123 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the first transmitted member 3122, the second transmission guide portion 3123d is also rotated, and the second transmission guide portion 3123d and the second transmitted guide are also rotated. An attempt is made to revolve the second movable base driving member 3124 around the rotary link member 3123 via the portion 3124c.

  However, since the second movable base driving member 3124 is rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116 and cannot revolve around the rotary link member 3123, the force acting on the second transmitted guide portion 3124c. Conversely, the rotational link member 3123 is about to revolve around the second movable base driving member 3124. At this time, the rotation link member 3123 intersects the direction in which the first transmission guide portion 3122e extends (first direction) and the direction in which the second transmission guide portion 3123d extends (first direction). (The second direction extending in the second direction), the rotation link member 3123 slides in the first direction and the second direction so that the force acting on the rotation link member 3123 is reduced. Becomes Accordingly, the rotation of the first transmitted member 3122 is transmitted to the second movable base driving member 3124 by the rotation of the rotating link member 3123 and the sliding in the first direction and the second direction, and the second movable base driving member 3124 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front (see FIGS. 115 (f) to 116 (h)).

  In other words, the rotation link member 3123 is forcibly rotated by the second transmitted member 3122 by the first transmitted guide portion 3122e and the first transmitted guide portion 3123b. When the rotation link member 3123 rotates clockwise in front view, the second transmission guide portion 3123d, which has been vertically extended in FIG. 115 (e), is inclined and inclined so that the upper end thereof moves rightward. (See FIG. 115 (f)). When the second transmission guide portion 3123d rotates and tilts, the second movable base driving member 3124 attempts to revolve via the second transmitted guide portion 3124c guided by the second transmission guide portion 3123d. Since the base driving member 3124 is attached to the first movable base 3116 and cannot revolve, the rotation link member 3123 causes the first transmission by the reaction force of the force acting from the rotating link member 3123 to the second movable base driving member 3124. It slides largely to the open side (right side in front view) along the guide portion 3122e, and slightly slides to the rotation center side (downward) of the second movable base drive member 3124 along the second transmission guide portion 3123d. Then, the second movable base driving member 3124 rotates at the same angle as the angle at which the second transmission guide portion 3123d is inclined.

  When the second movable base driving member 3124 rotates clockwise in front view, the second working pin 3124a revolves so as to move downward, so that the second working pin 3124a is slidably inserted. The second movable base 3119 slides downward via the second bearing slit 3119a. Since the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is attached to the second movable base 3119, the back upper decorative body unit 3105 slides further downward from the first appearance position together with the second movable base 3119. At this time, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is rotatably mounted by the shaft 3151a and the bearing hole 3119b of the second movable base 3119, and the decorative body rotation mounted on the rear end of the shaft 3151a. Since the gear 3120 is meshed with the rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115 attached to the first movable base 3116, when the second movable base 3119 slides downward, the decoration body rotating gear 3120 and the back decoration body are rotated together. The unit 3150 rotates counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 115 (f) and the like).

  When the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the second transmitted member 3122 is further rotated in the clockwise direction via the second transmission member 3108, the rotating link member 3123 is connected to the second transmitted member 3122. It rotates in the clockwise direction at the same angle, further slides to the open side along the first transmission guide portion 3122e, and the center of the rotary link member 3123 is second movable along the second transmission guide portion 3123d. The second movable base driving member 3124 further rotates in the clockwise direction by sliding so as to approach the rotation center of the base driving member 3124. Accordingly, the back upper decoration unit 3150 slides further downward together with the second movable base 3119, and the back upper decoration unit 3150 further rotates counterclockwise (see FIG. 116 (g)).

  When the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the second transmission member 3108 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the second transmission pin 3108b is disengaged from the second transmission slit 3122c and the second lock The protrusion 3108c enters another second lock recess 3122d different from the second lock recess 3122d into which the second lock protrusion 3108c was originally inserted. Accordingly, the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is stopped, the downward sliding of the second movable base 3199 is stopped, and the upside-down decoration unit 3150 is turned 180 degrees with respect to the first appearance position. It stops in a rotated state (see FIGS. 110 and 116 (h)). This state is a state in which the first movable base 3116 and the second movable base 3119 are located together at the lower end of the elevating range, and the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is located at the second appearance position. . In the second transmission member 3108, the rotation range in which the second transmission pin 3108b is inserted into the second transmission slit 3122c of the second transmitted member 3122 is the second specific rotation range.

  In a state where the back upper decorative body unit 3150 (back upper decorative body 3152) is in the second appearance position, the second lock projection 3108c of the second transmission member 3108 is located in the second lock recess 3122d of the second transmitted member 3122. Since it is inserted, the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is prevented, and the second movable base 3119 does not slide further downward. When the back decoration unit 3150 is in the second appearance position, as shown in FIG. 148, the top and bottom of the predetermined character simulated by the back decoration 3152 is in a normal state, and The upper decorative body 3152 is located substantially at the center in the frame of the center accessory 2500, and substantially the entire back upper decorative body 3152 can be visually recognized from the player side.

  When the back upper decorative body unit 3150 descends from the first appearance position to the second appearance position, the upper back decorative body 3152 rotates downward by 180 degrees while descending while the top and bottom are reversed. Then, it is possible to present to the player a movable effect positioned substantially in the center of the frame of the center role 2500 (the front surface of the central liquid crystal display device 1500) in a state in which the top and bottom are normal, and to greatly surprise the player Can be.

  When the drive gear 3104 is rotated by the back upper drive motor 3103 in the range direction (clockwise direction in front view) with the back upper drive motor 3103 in the state where the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is in the second appearance position, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 Rises toward the retreat position through the first appearance position while performing the reverse operation, and when the detection piece 3111a of the left slider 3111 is detected by the back-up / down detection sensor 3112, the drive gear by the back-up drive motor 3103 The rotation of 3104 stops, and the back upper decorative body unit 3150 returns to the retracted position.

  The back upper movable effect unit 3100 can raise and lower the back upper decorative body unit 3150 in two stages from the retreat position to the first appearance position, and further from the first appearance position to the second appearance position. Separately, the upper back decoration 3157 (the second decoration 3157a) can be slid left and right with respect to the upper back decoration 3152 (in a direction perpendicular to the vertical direction of the back upper decoration 3152). By appropriately combining, various movable effects can be presented.

[5-9f. Movable production unit in front of the back]
Next, the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 117 (b) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 118 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the front lower back first decorative body and the rear lower front second decorative body of the front lower back movable effect unit from the front in a normal retracted position, and FIG. 118 (b). FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the front lower back front first decorative body and the rear lower front second decorative body of the rear lower front movable effect unit from the front in the appearance position.

  The lower back front movable rendering unit 3200 is arranged below the opening 3101a near the front end in the back box 3010. The lower back front movable rendering unit 3200 has a flat plate-shaped unit base 3201 attached to the front of the back lower rear movable rendering unit 3500, and is mounted at the upper left corner of the rear surface of the unit base 3201 when viewed from the front. The lower back front drive motor 3202 that penetrates forward through 3201, the drive gear 3203 attached to the rotation shaft of the lower back front drive motor 3202, meshes with the drive gear 3203 from the lower right in front view. A transmission gear 3204 rotatably attached to the unit base 3201 and a pinion gear 3205 meshed with the transmission gear 3204 from the lower right in front view and rotatably attached to the unit base 3201 are provided.

  The lower back front movable effecting unit 3200 has a rack gear 3206a that meshes with the pinion gear 3205 from the right in front view and extends vertically, and a flat detection piece 3206b protruding to the right in front view. The rack member 3206 is attached to the unit base 3201 so as to be slidable up and down, and the drive gear 3203, the transmission gear 3204, the pinion gear 3205, and the rack member 3206 are attached to the front surface of the unit base 3201. The unit includes a unit cover 3207 that covers from the front, and a lower back front movable detection sensor 3208 attached to the unit cover 3207 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3206b of the rack member 3206.

  Furthermore, the lower back front movable effecting unit 3200 has a link pin 3209a projecting rearward from a position between the center and the left end in the left-right direction in front view, and the left end in front view is the upper end of the rack member 3206. And a translucent front first decorative body 3209 provided with a three-dimensional decoration and attached to the unit base 3201 so that the right end thereof in front view is slidable up and down. A lower back front first decorative substrate 3210 attached to the back of one decorative body 3209 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, a strip-plate-shaped first lower back front decorative body 3209 and a unit base The unit base 3201 and the unit cover 3207 are rotatably mounted near the center of the unit base 3201 in the left-right direction between the unit base 3201 and the unit cover 3201. A link member 3211 having an arc-shaped link slit 3211a into which the slide member 9a is slidably inserted, and a lower back front attached to the tip of the link member 3211 and imitating a predetermined character's hand. It comprises a second decorative body 3212, and a lower back lower second decorative substrate 3213 attached to the rear surface of the lower back lower second decorative body 3212 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  Next, the operation of the lower back front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back front second decorative body 3212 in the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the back lower front movable effecting unit 3200 moves down in the rack member 3206 to which the first lower back front decorative body 3209 is attached in the normal state, in the vertical sliding direction. A link member 3211 that is located at the end and to which the lower back front second decorative body 3212 is attached extends obliquely so that the tip is located slightly above the horizontal.

  In this state, the lower back front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back front second decorative body 3212 are located below the frame of the center role 2500 and cannot be visually recognized from the player side (FIG. 83 etc.). That is, in the normal state, the lower back front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back front second decorative body 3212 are in a retracted position where they cannot be visually recognized by the player. In a state where the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3212 are in the retracted position, the detection piece 3206b of the rack member 3206 is detected by the lower back front movable detection sensor 3208.

  In the normal state, when the lower back front drive motor 3202 rotates the drive gear 3203 in the counterclockwise direction in front view, the pinion gear 3205 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, The rack member 3206 is moved up by the rack gear 3206a meshing with the pinion gear 3205. Since the lower back front first decorative body 3209 is attached to the upper end of the rack member 3206, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 also moves up together with the rack member 3206.

  When the back lower front decorative body 3209 rises, the link pin 3209a inserted in the link slit 3211a of the link member 3211 also rises. As a result, the link member 3211 rotates around the base end in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front. Since the lower back front second decorative body 3212 is attached to the tip of the link member 3211, the lower back lower front second decorative body 3212 moves upward with the rise of the back lower front first decorative body 3209. Rotate to move.

  Thereafter, when the rack member 3206 reaches the rising end, the rotation of the lower back front drive motor 3202 stops, the raising of the lower back front first decorative body 3209 stops, and the rotation of the lower back lower second decorative body 3212. Stops. In this state, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), the link member 3211 is in a state of being substantially upright, and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 is located above the back lower front first decorative body 3209. .

  Further, in a state where the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3212 are raised, as shown in FIG. , Is located within the front view frame of the center role item 2500, and can be sufficiently viewed from the player side (front). That is, the lower back front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back front second decorative body 3212 are in the appearance positions where they can be visually recognized from the player side. As shown in FIG. 148, the lower back front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back front second decorative body 3212 are located in front of the back upper decorative body 3152 of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 in the appearance position. And does not come into contact with the upper back decoration 3152. The lower back front second decorative body 3212 is formed so as to partially move forward and backward with respect to the upper back decorative body 3152 at the second appearance position by moving to the appearance position.

  In the state where the lower back front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back front second decorative body 3212 are in the appearance position, the drive gear 3103 is moved by the back lower front drive motor 3102 in the opposite direction (clockwise direction in front view). ), The back lower front first decorative body 3209 descends and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 rotates to move leftward in front view. Then, when the detection piece 3206b of the rack member 3206 is detected by the lower back front movable detection sensor 3208, the rotation drive of the lower back lower drive motor 3102 is stopped, and the lowering of the lower back front first decorative body 3209 is stopped, and Then, the rotation of the back lower front second decorative body 3212 is stopped, and the lower back lower first decorative body 3209 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3212 return to the retracted position.

  As described above, the back lower front movable rendering unit 3200 sets the lower back lower first decorative body 3209 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3212 outside the frame (retreat position) and within the frame (appearance position) of the center role 2500. , The player can be surprised by appearing in the frame of the center role 2500. In addition, the lower back front first decorative body 3209 is raised, and the lower back lower second decorative body 3212 is rotated and appears. Since 3212 and 3212 appear in different movements, it is possible to give the illusion that the movement of the movable effect is a complicated movement, and entertain the player.

[5-9 g. Back right movable production unit]
Next, the back right movable rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 (a) is a perspective view of the back right movable rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 119 (b) is a perspective view of the back right movable rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 120 (a) is a front view of the back right movable effect rendering unit showing the first decoration surface of the back right rotating decorative body facing the front, and (b) is a back right rotating decorative body in (a). It is a front view of the back right movable production unit which shows the state which opened the shutter of (a), (c) is a front view of the back right movable production unit which shows the state in which the 2nd decoration surface of the back right rotary decorative body is turned to the front. (D) is a front view of the back-right movable effect unit showing the third decorative surface of the back-right rotating decorative body facing the front.

  The rear right movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the right side of the opening 3010a in front view in the rear box 3010. The back right movable rendering unit 3300 includes a back right metal plate base 3301 mounted in the back box 3010 and extending vertically in a U shape when viewed from the front, and a back upper right base mounted on the upper front of the back right metal plate base 3301. 3302; a lower right lower base 3303 attached to the lower front of the lower right sheet metal base 3301; a lower right drive motor 3304 mounted to the lower surface of the lower right base 3303; And a column-shaped back right rotating decorative body 3310 rotatably attached by a back upper right base 3302 and a back lower right base 3303.

  The back right sheet metal base 3301 is formed of a metal plate. The back upper right base 3302 has a cylindrical cover portion 3302a having a low height that covers the upper part of the back right rotating decorative body 3310, and a cutout portion 3302b formed by cutting out a predetermined range in the circumferential direction of the cover portion 3302a. . The lower right back base 3303 has a discharge port 3303a penetrating vertically. The notch 3302b of the rear upper right base 3302 is located immediately after the rear discharge port 2554 in the center role 2500 when the gaming board 5 is assembled. The outlet 3303a of the lower right rear base 3303 is located immediately above the second entrance 3042 of the lower right ball passage unit 3040.

  The back right rotating decorative body 3310 has a first decorative surface 3310a, a second decorative surface 3310b, and a third decorative surface 3310c that divide the outer peripheral surface into three in the circumferential direction. The back right rotating decorative body 3310 includes an opening 3311 extending vertically and opening on the first decorative surface 3310a, and a pair of openings 3311 that are closed from the center of rotation and are respectively slidably mounted vertically. , An inner decoration 3313 attached to the center of the opening 3311 in the vertical direction on the rotation center side of the pair of shutters 3312, and attached to the rotation center side of the inner decoration 3313 and facing outward. A first right back decorative board (not shown) in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface on which it is mounted, and a pair of shutters 3312 which are attached to the center of rotation with respect to the first right back decorative board and approach or separate from each other. And a back right shutter solenoid (not shown) that slides as described above.

  On the first decorative surface 3310a of the back right rotating decorative body 3310, usually, a pair of shutters 3312 are close to each other and in contact with each other (see FIG. 120A). Then, when the pair of shutters 3312 is separated by driving the back right shutter solenoid according to the game state, the inside decoration 3313 faces the outside from between the pair of shutters 3312, and in this state, the back right first decoration. By lighting the LED on the substrate, the player can see the inner decorative body 3313 decorated with light emission.

  Although not shown in detail in the second decorative surface 3310b of the back right rotating decorative body 3310, a predetermined right character is formed in a relief shape, and a back right character decoration 3318 having translucency is provided. Have. On the rotation center side of the second decorative surface 3310b, a back right second decorative substrate (not shown) having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface facing outward is attached. The second decorative surface 3310b (back right character decoration 3318) can be illuminated by the decorative substrate.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 120 (d), the third decoration surface 3310c of the back right rotating decoration body 3310 is opened so that a game ball can enter the same height as the cover 3302a of the back upper right base 3302. Game ball which is communicated with the rear right ball entrance 3320 and the discharge port 3303a of the rear lower right base 3303, and is disposed closer to the rotation center than the outer peripheral surface. And a ball guiding member 3322 mounted in the back right production space 3321 and spirally rolling a game ball having entered the back right ball entrance 3320 downward. And a back right third decorative board 3323 extending up and down adjacent to the right effect space 3321 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  Next, an operation of the back right rotary decorative body 3310 in the back right movable rendering unit 3300 will be described. The back right movable effect unit 3300 can rotate the back right rotary decorative body 3310 in any direction about the axis extending in the vertical direction by the rotational driving of the back right drive motor 3304. In the back right movable effect unit 3300, in a normal state (first decorative state), the first decorative surface 3310a faces forward as shown in FIG. In the first decorative surface 3310a, a pair of shutters 3312 disposed closer to the rotation center than the opening 3311 usually abut each other to close the opening 3311.

  In the first decorative state, the cutout 3302b of the cover 3302a on the back upper right base 3302 is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decorative surface 3310a. Therefore, when the back right movable rendering unit 3300 is in the first decorative state, the rear discharge port 2554 of the center role 2500 that matches the cutout 3302b is also closed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decorative surface 3310a. Thereby, in the first decoration state, when a game ball is received in the upper winning winning opening 2006 of the center role 2500, the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear taxiway 2553 is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decoration surface 3310a. Therefore, the game ball received at the upper winning a prize entrance 2006 enters the escape passage 2555 branched near the rear end of the rear taxiway 2553, passes through the escape passage 2555, and passes through the discharge opening 2556 to the back right ball passage. It is delivered to the third entrance 3043 of the unit 3040 and discharged downward through the inside of the rear right ball passage unit 3040.

  When the back right shutter solenoid (not shown) is energized in the first decoration state in the back right movable rendering unit 3300, the pair of shutters 3312 is separated in the vertical direction, and the inner decorative body 3313 is moved from between the pair of shutters 3312. It is in a state of facing outward (see FIG. 120 (b)). Then, an LED (high-brightness LED) on the back right first decorative board (not shown) arranged on the rotation center side with respect to the inner decorative body 3313 emits light, and the inner decorative body 3313 facing from between the pair of shutters 3312 emits light. Decorate. Thereby, the arrival of a chance or the like can be suggested to the player.

  In addition, the back right movable rendering unit 3300 may be in a state (second decoration state) in which the second decoration surface 3310b of the back right rotary decorative body 3310 is stopped forward by the rotational driving of the back right drive motor 3304. (See FIG. 120 (c)). In this second decoration state, the LED of the back right second decoration board (not shown) emits light, so that the back right character decoration 3318 made of predetermined characters formed on the second decoration surface 3310b can be made to emit light. It is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player. In the second decorative state, similarly to the first decorative state, the cutout 3302b of the cover 3302a is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the second decorative surface 3310b.

  Furthermore, the back right movable rendering unit 3300 may be in a state (third decoration state) in which the third decoration surface 3310c of the back right rotary decorative body 3310 is stopped forward by the rotational driving of the back right drive motor 3304. (See FIG. 120 (d)). In the third decoration state, as shown in the drawing, the back right effect space 3321 through which game balls can be distributed can be visually recognized from the player side. In the third decoration state, the back right ball entrance 3320 is located at the cutout 3302b of the cover 3302a. Accordingly, in the third decoration state, the rear discharge port 2554 of the center role 2500 and the back right ball entrance 3320 coincide with each other, and the game balls are communicated so as to be able to flow.

  Then, in the third decoration state, the game ball received at the upper winning award opening 2006 of the center role 2500 enters the rear right ball entrance 3320 from the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear taxiway 2553, and the rear right rendering space 3321. (See FIG. 156 (a)), while being rotated a plurality of times (here, eight times) around an axis extending vertically in the back right rendering space 3321 by the ball guiding member 3322 disposed at the bottom (see FIG. 156 (a)). . As a result, the game balls received in the upper winning opening 2006 can be spirally flown down in the back right production space 3321, so that the player can surely recognize the gaming balls received in the upper winning opening 2006. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for paying out game balls by accepting the game balls into the upper winning prize opening 2006, and to entertain the player with the spirally flowing game balls. Can be suppressed.

  Thereafter, the game ball flowing down in the back right production space 3321 is discharged from the discharge port 3303a of the back lower right base 3303, and enters the second entrance 3042 of the lower right ball guiding unit 3040 which is opened right below. Are discharged into the lower substrate holder 1200 through the lower right ball passage unit 3040.

  As described above, according to the back right movable effect unit 3300, various movable effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be entertained.

[5-9h. Back left movable directing unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 123. FIG. 121 (a) is a perspective view of the back left movable rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) is a perspective view of the back left movable rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 122 (a) is a front view of the back left movable rendering unit showing the first decoration surface of the back left rotating decorative body facing the front, and (b) is a second decoration of the back left rotating decorative body. It is a front view of the back left movable production unit which shows the state which turned the surface to the front, and (c) is a front view of the back left movable production unit which shows the state in which the 3rd decoration surface of the back left rotating decorative body faces the front. (D) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit showing the state where the back left projecting decorative body of the back left rotating decorative body is in the appearance position in the state of (a). Further, FIG. 123 is a sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 122 (a).

  The rear left movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in front view in the rear box 3010. The back left movable rendering unit 3400 includes a back left metal plate base 3401 mounted in the back box 3010 and extending vertically in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and a back left upper base mounted on the upper front of the back left metal plate base 3401. 3402, a lower back left base 3403 attached to the lower front surface of the back left metal plate base 3401, a back left drive motor 3404 attached to the lower surface of the back lower left base 3403, and a back left drive motor 3404 to be rotated. And a column-shaped back left rotating decorative body 3410 rotatably attached by the back left upper base 3402 and the back left lower base 3403. The back left sheet metal base 3401 is formed of a metal plate.

  The back left rotating decorative body 3410 has a first decorative surface 3410a, a second decorative surface 3410b, and a third decorative surface 3410c that divide the outer peripheral surface into three in the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 122 (a), the back left rotating decorative body 3410 has a door decoration 3411 imitating a door on a first decorative surface 3410a. The back left rotating decorative body 3410 is arranged on the rotation center side of the first decorative surface, and has a back left first decorative substrate 3412 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on a surface facing outward. . By appropriately illuminating the LEDs of the back left first decorative substrate 3412, the first decorative surface 3410a can be illuminated.

  Although not shown in detail in the second decorative surface 3410b of the back left rotating decorative body 3410, a character different from the back right character decoration 3318 of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 is formed in a relief shape. The back left character decoration 3413 having translucency is provided. On the rotation center side of the second decorative surface 3410b, a back left second decorative substrate 3414 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on a surface facing outward is attached. The second decorative surface 3410b (back left character decoration 3413) can be illuminated.

  Further, on the third decorative surface 3410c of the back left rotating decorative body 3410, the back left projecting portion 3415 forming the outer peripheral surface and the rotation center side with respect to the back left projecting portion 3415 are arranged to have a light transmitting property. And a rear left third decorative board 3417 on which a plurality of color LEDs are mounted on a surface facing the center of rotation with respect to the projection film 3416 and facing outward. Although not shown, the projection film 3416 has a red symbol projected in red and a blue symbol projected in blue, which are represented by a single color and are different from each other. The part where the design and the blue design overlap is made milky or transparent, and the part other than the red design and the blue design is made black or opaque. In this third decorative portion 3410c, on the back left third decorative substrate 3417, when a red light is emitted, a red symbol can be projected on the back left projection portion 3415, and when a blue light is emitted, a blue symbol is projected on the back. The image can be projected on the left projection unit 3415.

  In addition, the third decorative surface 3410c is provided with a pair of door members 3420 that are vertically arranged at the end near the first decorative surface 3410a in the back left projection unit 3415 and that can be opened and closed. A pair of back left protrusions disposed on the rotation center side and slidably mounted between a retracted position inside the outer circumferential surface of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and an appearance position protruding outside the outer circumferential surface. It comprises a decorative body 3421 and a pair of back left decorative body solenoids 3422 mounted in the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and slidably driving each back left protruding decorative body 3421.

  As shown, the door member 3420 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically. Although not shown, the door member 3420 is rotatably mounted at both ends of a vertically extending side far from the first decorative surface 3410a, and has a third vertically extending side at the opposite side. It opens and closes so as to move outside the decorative surface 3410c. Further, the door member 3420 has a hook-shaped closing claw 3420a that is rotatably mounted and protrudes from an inner surface near the vertically extending side.

  The back left projecting decorative body 3421 is attached such that the sliding direction is the left-right direction when the first decorative surface 3410a is directed forward (front). The back left protruding decorative body 3421 is formed in a shape imitating a shuriken as shown in FIG. 122 (d) and the like. The back left protruding decorative body 3421 protrudes from the vicinity of the front end in a direction away from the first decorative surface 3410a, and has a closing piece 3421a that can be engaged with the closing claw 3420a of the door member 3420.

  Subsequently, an operation of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 in the back left movable effect unit 3400 will be described. The back left movable effect unit 3400 can rotate the back left rotating decorative body 3410 in any direction about the axis extending in the up-down direction by rotating the back left drive motor 3404. In the normal state (first decorative state), the back left movable rendering unit 3400 stops the first decorative surface 3410a facing forward as shown in FIG. 122 (a). In this first decoration state, the first decoration surface 3410a can be illuminated by appropriately lighting the LED of the back left first decoration substrate 3412. Since the first decorative surface 3410a is provided with a door decoration 3411 imitating a door, the first decorative surface 3410a is illuminated and decorated to make the player think that the door decoration 3411 may be opened. And the player's sense of expectation can be increased.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, in a normal state, the back left projecting decorative body 3421 of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 is housed inside the back left rotating decorative body 3410 by the urging force of a spring (not shown). It is located at the evacuation position. In this retracted position, the outer surface of the door member 3420 is in a closed state in which the outer surface is flush with the third decorative surface 3410c, and the closing piece 3421a of the back left projecting decorative body 3421 is closed by the closing claw of the door member 3420. 3420a. Thereby, even if centrifugal force acts on the back left projecting decorative body 3421 or the door member 3420 by rotating the back left rotating decorative body 3410 around, the urging force of a spring (not shown) moves the back left projecting decorative body 3421 to the appearance position. Of the door member 3420 can be prevented from being opened by locking the closing piece 3421a with the locking claw 3420a.

  When the back left decorative body solenoid 3422 is driven (energized) in the first decoration state, the back left protruding decorative body 3421 slides outward against the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the back left protruding side. The door member 3420 is opened by being pushed by the tip of the decorative body 3421, and the decorative body 3421 in the back left position is in an appearance position in which the decorative body 3421 projects outward beyond the third decorative surface 3410c. Thereby, the back left protruding decorative body 3421 protrudes from the back left rotating decorative body 3410 which rotates in a cylindrical shape, which can surprise the player. Further, since the pair of back left protruding decorative bodies 3421 can be protruded independently of each other, various movable effects can be presented to the player.

  When the drive of the back left decorative body solenoid 3422 is stopped in the appearance position, the back left protruding decorative body 3421 slides to the retracted position by a spring (not shown). At this time, the closing piece 3421a is locked by the locking claw 3420a, and the door member 3420 can be turned from the open state to the closed state, and automatically returns to the normal state.

  The rear left movable effect unit 3400 may be in a state (second decoration state) in which the second decoration surface 3410b of the rear left rotary decorative body 3410 is stopped forward by the rotational driving of the rear left driving motor 3404. (See FIG. 122 (b)). In the second decoration state, the LED on the back left second decoration board 3414 is appropriately illuminated, so that the back left character decoration 3413 can be illuminated and decorated, suggesting the arrival of a chance to the player. Can be.

  Further, the back left movable rendering unit 3400 may be in a state (third decoration state) in which the third decoration surface 3410c of the back left rotary decorative body 3410 is stopped forward by the rotational driving of the back left driving motor 3404. (See FIG. 122 (c)). In this third decoration state, when the red light is emitted by the LED of the back left third decoration substrate 3417, the red design can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415, and when the blue light is emitted, the blue design can be displayed. The image can be projected on the rear left projection unit 3415. Thereby, the arrival of a chance or the like can be suggested to the player by the symbol projected on the back left projection unit 3415, and the player can be entertained or have an increased sense of expectation.

  As described above, according to the back right movable effect unit 3300, various movable effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be entertained.

[5-9i. Movable production unit behind the back]
Next, the rear-facing movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 124 (a) is a perspective view of the rear effect unit behind the rear unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 124 (b) is a perspective view of the rear effect unit behind the rear unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the up-down unit of the movable effect unit behind the back and seen from the front, and FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the up-down unit of the movable effect unit behind the back and seen from behind. FIG. FIG. 127 is an explanatory front view showing the state of the elevating unit when the back decoration unit is at the lower end position, and FIG. 128 is the elevation unit when the back decoration unit is at the upper end position. It is explanatory drawing which shows a state from the front.

  Further, FIG. 129 (a) is a front view of the rear underside movable effect unit, and FIG. 129 (b) is a perspective view of the underside rear rotational decorative body unit of the underside rear movable effect unit as viewed from the front. () Is a perspective view of the lower back rotating ornamental body unit of the lower back rear movable effect unit as viewed from behind. Further, FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the back decoration rear rotating decoration unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the back decoration rear decoration decoration unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 132 is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. 129 (a).

  Further, FIG. 133 (a) is a front view showing a state in which the back-and-bottom rotating decoration body of the back-and-back bottom rotation decoration unit has stopped rotating, and FIG. It is a front view showing the state where it is rotating in the direction of rotation, and (c) is a front view showing the state just before the back decoration under rotation opens and rotates clockwise in front view, and (d) () Is a front view showing a state in which the back decoration is rotating clockwise in front view. FIG. 134 (a) is an explanatory view showing a configuration of a drive mechanism relating to a back-bottom rear rotation drive motor in the back-bottom rear rotation decorative body unit, and (b) of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of such a differential mechanism, (c) is the connection which connects the drive mechanism which concerns on a lower back rear rotation drive motor, and the differential mechanism which concerns on a rotation damper in a back lower rotation decoration body unit. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration of a mechanism.

  FIG. 135 (a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the connecting mechanism when the back decoration is closed and the rotation is stopped, and FIG. 135 (b) is a drawing in which the back decoration is rotated counterclockwise. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state of the coupling mechanism when rotating in a direction. FIG. 136 (a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the connecting mechanism when the rotating decorative body is closed and the rotation is stopped after the back, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism when a rotation decoration body is opening after rotation and back and back, and (c) is a rotation ring of a drive mechanism further rotating clockwise, and a back and bottom rotation decoration. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the connection mechanism when a body is completely opened, (d) When the back decoration under rotation of an open state rotates in the clockwise direction with the connection mechanism of a drive mechanism. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing a state of the coupling mechanism of FIG.

  The back lower movable effect unit 3500 is attached below the opening 3010 a near the rear end in the back box 3010. The under-rear-movable effect unit 3500 is mounted in a back box 3010 and has an under-rear-front movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the front surface thereof, and a back-and-under-rear rotating decoration body which is vertically moved by the elevating unit 3510. And a unit 3550.

  The elevating unit 3510 of the rear-facing rear movable production unit 3500 is mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 3511 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the front surface of the rear wall, and the lower left corner of the unit base 3511 in front view. A back-and-bottom rear elevating drive motor 3512 having a rotating shaft protruding forward through the unit base 3511; a spur gear-shaped elevating and lowering drive gear 3513 attached to the rotating shaft of the back-and-bottom rear elevating drive motor 3512; A first transmission gear 3514a in the form of a spur gear meshing with the lifting drive gear 3513, and a second transmission gear 3514b that rotates integrally with the front surface of the first transmission gear 3514a and has a smaller diameter than the first transmission gear 3514a. A transmission gear member 3514 rotatably attached to the unit base 3511; And A member second transmission gear 3514b engaged to and unit base 3511 lifting drive pinion gear 3515 rotatably mounted in and spur gear shape of 3514, and a.

  The elevating unit 3510 also has a guide slit 3516a extending vertically at the approximate center in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a plate-shaped detection piece 3516b projecting leftward from the lower left end in front view. An elevating base 3516 which is slidably mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3510 so as to be vertically slidable, and which is mounted on the rear surface thereof by a guide slit 3516a so as to be slidable vertically. A lifting drive rack gear 3517 that is attached to the rear surface near the left end in front view and extends vertically and meshes with the lifting drive pinion gear 3515, and extends vertically and the upper end is the same height as the upper end of the unit base 3511. Fixed rack gear 3 attached to the front of the unit base 3511 18 meshes with the fixed-side rack gear 3518 and the up-and-down extending movable-side rack gear 3551b attached to the rear surface of the back-and-back rear rotating decorative body unit 3550, and is rotatably attached to the elevating base 3516. And an acceleration gear 3519 in the form of a spur gear.

  Further, the lifting unit 3510 is mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3511 so as to cover the front of the lifting drive gear 3513, the transmission gear member 3514, the lifting drive pinion gear 3515, and the fixed rack gear 3518 on the left side in the front view of the lifting base 3516. Gear cover left 3520, a back-and-back elevating detection sensor 3521 attached to the front surface of the gear cover left 3520 and capable of detecting the detecting piece 3516b of the elevating base 3516, and a unit on the right side of the elevating base 3516 when viewed from the front. A guide pinion gear 3522 in the form of a spur gear rotatably attached to the front surface of the base 3511, and meshing with the guide pinion gear 3522, extending vertically and attached to the rear surface of the lifting base 3516 on the right end side in front view. Guide rack gear 3523 and guide rack gear 3523 The gear cover right 3524 is attached to the front of the unit base 3511 and the lower end is attached to the elevating base 3516, and the upper end is attached to the gear cover left 3520 and the gear cover right 3524, respectively. And a pair of assist springs 3525 for urging the spring upward.

  The lifting unit 3510 includes a board base 3526 attached to a rear surface on the right end side of the unit base 3511 in a front view and a back surface of the board base 3526. Detection sensor 3521, lower back rear rotation drive motor 3553, lower back lower rotation detection sensor 3570, and lower back rear relay board which relays the connection between lower back decoration board 3572, motor drive board 3062, and lamp drive board 3060. 3527.

  Next, an operation of the lifting unit 3510 in the rear lower movable effect unit 3500 will be described. The rear bottom movable effect unit 3500 is located at a lower end position where the rear lower rotary decoration 3550 is lowered most in a normal state. In this lower end position state, as shown in FIG. 127, at the upper ends of the elevating drive rack gear 3517 and the guide rack gear 3523 attached to the elevating base 3516, the elevating drive pinion gear 3515 attached to the unit base 3511 and the guide The pinion gears 3522 mesh with each other. The acceleration gear 3519 attached to the elevating base 3516 meshes with the lower end of the fixed-side rack gear 3518 attached to the unit base 3511 and is movable to the lower back and rear rotating decorative body unit 3550. It meshes with the upper end of the side rack gear 3551b.

  Also, in the state of the lower end position, the guide pin 3552b of the back-and-back rear decorative body unit 3550 inserted into the guide slit 3516a of the elevating base 3516 via the guide bush 3528 is located at the lower end of the guide slit 3516a. ing. Further, in the state of the descending end position, the detecting piece 3516b of the elevating base 3516 is detected by the back-and-back elevating detection sensor 3521, and the pair of assist springs 3525 extend to urge the elevating base 3516 upward. are doing.

  When the under-rear movable decoration unit 3550 is at the lower end position, the under-rear rotational decoration 3568 is lower than the lower end of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 as shown in FIG. A part is visible from the player side above the stage 2530 in the frame of the center role 2500 below.

  When the back-and-back lower elevating drive motor 3512 rotates the elevating drive gear 3513 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front when the back-and-back lower rotating decorative body unit 3550 is at the lower end position, the elevating drive pinion gear 3515 rotates counterclockwise. The lifting base 3516 is lifted by the lifting drive rack gear 3517 meshing with the lifting drive pinion gear 3515. When the elevating base 3516 moves up, the acceleration gear 3519 rotatably attached to the elevating base 3516 also moves up together with the elevating base 3516. Since the acceleration gear 3519 is meshed with the fixed rack gear 3518 attached to the unit base 3511, when the elevating base 3516 (acceleration gear 3519) rises with respect to the unit base 3511, the acceleration gear 3519 is inverted from the front. It will rotate clockwise.

  This acceleration gear 3519 is on the opposite side of the fixed-side rack gear 3518, and is engaged with the movable-side rack gear 3551b attached to the back-and-under rear rotating decorative body unit 3550, so that the acceleration gear 3519 moves in the counterclockwise direction. When rotated, the rear decorative body unit 3550 moves up and down relative to the lift base 3516 via the movable rack gear 3551b. At this time, the back-and-under rear rotation decorative body unit 3550 is raised at twice the speed of the lifting base 3516 by the acceleration gear 3519 meshing with the fixed rack gear 3518 of the unit base 3511.

  Further, in the elevating unit 3510, since the guide rack gear 3523 on the opposite side of the elevating drive rack gear 3517 in the elevating base 3516 meshes with the guide pinion gear 3522 rotatably attached to the unit base 3511, The elevating base 3516 can rise straight without the right end side of the base 3516 being twisted. Furthermore, in the elevating unit 3510, since the elevating base 3516 is urged upward by the pair of assist springs 3525, the load on the back-to-back lower elevating drive motor 3512 is reduced. In addition, in the pair of assist springs 3525, the right assist spring 3525, which is far from the elevation drive rack gear 3517 in front view, is extended longer than the left assist spring 3525 to increase the urging force, and the assist base 3516 is hardly tilted. are doing.

  Then, when the back decoration rear rotation decorative body unit 3550 is located at the highest rising end position, the back bottom lifting drive motor 3512 stops. In the state of the rising end position, as shown in FIG. 128, the guide pin 3552b of the back-and-back rear decorative body unit 3550 is located at the upper end of the guide slit 3516a of the lifting base 3516. Further, in the state of the rising end position, at the lower ends of the lifting drive rack gear 3517 and the guide rack gear 3523 mounted on the lifting base 3516, the lifting drive pinion gear 3515 and the guide pinion gear 3522 mounted on the unit base 3511 are respectively connected. Are engaged. The acceleration gear 3519 attached to the elevating base 3516 meshes at the upper end of the fixed rack gear 3518 attached to the unit base 3511, and is movable to the lower back and rear rotating decorative body unit 3550. It meshes with the lower end of the side rack gear 3551b.

  As shown in FIG. 152, when the back-and-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is at the rising end position, as shown in FIG. ) Is located in the approximate center. In addition, when the back-and-back lower elevating drive motor 3512 rotates the elevating drive gear 3513 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front with the back-and-back lower rotatable decorative body unit 3550 at the ascending end position, the reverse operation is performed. Then, the rotating decorative body unit 3550 descends, and returns to the descending end position.

  Next, the back-bottom rotating decoration unit 3550 of the back-bottom movable effect unit 3500 will be described. The back-and-back lower rotating decorative body unit 3550 includes a cylindrical shaft tube portion 3551a extending forward from the upper portion, and a movable rack gear 3551b extending vertically at the lower rear surface and meshing with the acceleration gear 3159. A shallow container-shaped decorative body base 3551 extending vertically and open at the front, and a shaft cylindrical part 3551a having a diameter larger than the shaft cylindrical part 3551a of the decorative body base 3551 at the upper part and penetrating forward and backward Have a through-hole 3552a inserted concentrically, and a guide pin 3552b that projects forward from the lower part in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the guide slit 3516a of the elevating unit 3510, and the rear is open. And a base cover 3552 attached to the front surface of the decorative body base 3551 in a shallow box shape.

  Also, The back decoration body unit 3550 after the back is A back-to-back rear rotation drive motor 3553 attached to a lower rear surface of the base cover 3552; A spur gear-shaped rotation drive gear 3554 attached to the rotation shaft of the rear bottom rotation drive motor 3553; A first driven gear 3555 in the form of a spur gear, which meshes with the rotation drive gear 3554 and is rotatably mounted between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552; A spur gear-shaped second driven gear 3556 meshed with the first driven gear 3555 and rotatably mounted between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552; A spur gear-shaped third driven gear 3557 meshed with the second driven gear 3556 and rotatably mounted between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552; A fourth driven gear 3558 in the form of a spur gear, which meshes with the third driven gear 3557 and is rotatably mounted between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552; An annular drive ring gear 3559a meshing with the fourth driven gear 3558, A plurality (three in this case) of engagement protrusions 3559b projecting forward from the front end of the drive ring gear 3559a while being spaced apart from the front end; A drive gear member 3559 having a drive detection piece 3559c that protrudes outward from the rear end of the drive ring gear 3559a in a flange shape and has a part cut off in the circumferential direction; Four mounting holes 3560a formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, A plurality of engagement recesses 3560b which are recessed forward from the rear end and into which the plurality of engagement protrusions 3559b of the drive gear member 3559 are inserted and engaged; Has, A ring-shaped connection ring 3560 formed with an outer diameter and an inner diameter substantially the same size as the drive gear member 3559; It has.

  The outer diameter and the inner diameter of the drive ring gear 3559 and the connection ring 3560 are formed smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 3552a of the base cover 3552, and larger than the outer diameter of the shaft cylindrical portion 3551a of the decorative body base 3551. The drive ring gear 3559 and the connection ring 3560 have the same inner shape. In the back-bottom rear decorative body unit 3550, the back-bottom rear rotation drive motor 3553, the rotation drive gear 3554, the first driven gear 3555, the second driven gear 3556, the third driven gear 3557, the fourth driven gear 3558, the driving gear member The drive mechanism 3550 </ b> A that is directly driven to rotate by the lower back rear drive motor 3553 includes the 3559 and the connection ring 3560 (see FIG. 134 (a) and the like).

  Further, the back-and-under rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 passes through the through-hole 3552a of the base cover 3552, the connecting ring 3560, and the driving ring member 3559 from the front, and the shaft cylindrical portion 3551a of the decorative body base 3551 is inserted. A cylindrical outer tube portion 3561a, a plurality of connection recesses 3561b that are recessed forward from the rear end of the outer tube portion 3561a and are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction, and an outer tube portion 3561a in front of the base cover 3552. A flat base portion 3561c extending outward from the front end of the outer cylindrical portion, and four guide slits 3561d penetrating back and forth through the base portion 3561c and radially extending around the axis of the outer cylindrical portion. Rotating decorative body base 3561, which is inserted into outer cylindrical portion 3561a of rotating decorative body base 3561, and has decorative body base. A cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 3562a through which the shaft cylindrical portion 3551a of the screw 3551 is inserted, a ring-shaped differential ring gear 3562b formed on the outer periphery of the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 3562a behind the drive gear member 3559, A plurality of connection protrusions 3562c that protrude from the front surface of the ring gear 3562b at intervals in the circumferential direction and are inserted and connected into the connection recesses 3561b of the rotary decorative body base 3561, and outward from the rear end of the differential ring gear 3562b. A differential gear member 3562 having a differential detecting piece 3562d that protrudes in a flange shape and has a part cut off in the circumferential direction is engaged with a differential ring gear 3562b of the differential gear member 3562. A spur gear-shaped differential transmission gear rotatably mounted coaxially with the fourth driven gear 3558 between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552. 563, a spur gear-shaped damper gear 3564 meshing with the differential transmission gear 3563, and a damper gear 3564 rotatably attached to the damper gear 3564 in a state of imparting rotational resistance thereto, and attached to the rear surface of the decorative body base 3551. And a rotating damper member 3565.

  The outer diameter of the outer cylindrical portion 3561a in the rotating decorative body base 3561 is slightly smaller than the inner diameters of the drive gear member 3559 and the connection ring 3560, and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylindrical portion 3561a enables the drive gear member 3559 and the connection ring 3560 to rotate. Installed. Further, the inner diameter of the outer cylindrical portion 3561a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 3562a of the differential gear member 3562. Base portion 3561c is formed to be larger than through hole 3552a of base cover 3552. The guide slit 3561d is formed at an interval of 90 degrees with respect to the circumferential direction of the outer cylindrical portion 3561a.

  The inner cylindrical portion 3562a of the differential gear member 3562 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft cylindrical portion 3551a of the decorative body base 3551, and is rotatably mounted by the shaft cylindrical portion 3551a. Although not shown in detail, the rotary damper member 3565 imparts rotational resistance to a rotary shaft to which the damper gear 3564 is attached by viscous resistance of a viscous fluid sealed therein. In the back decoration rear rotation decorative body unit 3550, the rotary decorative body base 3561, the differential gear member 3562, the differential transmission gear 3563, the damper gear 3564, and the rotary damper member 3565 directly apply rotational resistance to the rotary damper member 3565. (See FIG. 134 (b) and the like).

  In addition, the back decoration rear rotation decoration unit 3550 has a cylindrical slide pin 3566a that penetrates the guide slit 3561d and protrudes rearward, and each of the guides is disposed on the front surface of the base portion 3561c of the rotation decoration base 3561. It has four decorative body sliders 3566 respectively slidably mounted by slits 3561d, and a distal end hole 3567a which penetrates back and forth and through which a slide pin 3566a of the decorative body slider 3566 is rotatably inserted. At the same time, it has a proximal end pin 3567b protruding rearward in a columnar shape and rotatably inserted into a mounting hole 3560a of the coupling ring 3560, and has four strip-shaped coupling arms 3567, Four undersides attached to the front of each decorative body slider 3566 and decorated on the front A rotary decoration member 3568, and a, and four rotation restricting member 3569 which regulates the range of rotation of the connecting arm 3567 is attached to the rear surface of the backing under the rotated decorative body 3568.

  The underside rear rotating decorative body 3568 is formed in a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, one of the four vertices is formed at a right angle, and the opposite vertex on a diagonal passing through the right-angled vertex. Are formed at an acute angle. The underside rotating decorative body 3568 directs the right-angled vertex toward the rotation center axis of the rotating decorative body base 3561, and the diagonal line passing through the right-angled vertex is the sliding direction of the decorative body slider 3566 (the guide of the rotating decorative body base 3561). It is attached to decorative body slider 3566 so as to extend in the direction in which slit 3561d extends). The four back lower rotating decorative bodies 3568 can be slid so as to approach and separate from each other by the guide slits 3561d of the rotating decorative body base 3561.

  In the back-bottom rotating decorative body unit 3550, the decorative body slider 3566, the connecting arm 3567, the back-bottom rotating decorative body 3568, and the rotation restricting member 3569 connect the drive mechanism 3550A and the differential mechanism 3550B to rotate. A transmission mechanism 3550C for transmission is configured (see FIG. 134 (c) and the like).

  In addition, the back-and-back lower decorative body unit 3550 is mounted between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552, and the drive detection piece 3559c of the drive gear member 3559 and the differential detection piece 3562d of the differential ring gear 3562. And a fixed decorative body base 3571 that passes through the center of the rotary decorative body base 3561 from the front and the rear end of which is attached to the shaft cylindrical portion 3551a of the decorative body base 3551. A back lower back decoration board 3572 attached to the front of the fixed decoration base 3571 in front of the rotation decoration body base 3561 and behind the rear lower rotation decoration 3568, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front; It is attached to the front surface of the fixed decorative body base 3571 between the lower back decorative board 3572 and the lower back rotating decorative body 3568. Cage front decorated is provided with a disk-shaped subplantar after fixing the decorative body 3573 having a light-transmitting property with are subjected.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back-and-under-the-back rotating decorative body 3568 of the under-the-under-the-bottom-rotating decorative body unit 3550 in the under-the-under-the-bottom movable rendering unit 3500 will be described. In the normal state, the back-and-bottom rotating decorative body unit 3550 has four back-and-back rotating decorative bodies 35 slid toward the rotation center side of the rotating decorative body base 3561 and abut on each other. In a normal state, the drive gear member 3559 stops the cutout portion of the drive detection piece 3559c to the left in front view (see FIG. 134 (a)). Further, the differential gear member 3562 stops the cutout portion of the differential detection piece 3562d to the right in front view (see FIG. 134 (b)). Also, the four connecting arms 3567 are connected to the center of the base pin 3567b rotatably mounted in the mounting hole 3560a of the connecting ring 3560 and the center of the distal end hole 3567a by the axis of the connecting ring 3560. The slide pin 3566a of the decorative body slider 3566 that extends so as to be in contact with the circle about the rotation center and that is rotatably attached to the distal end hole 3567a is located on the rotation center side of the guide slit 3561d in the rotary decorative body base 3561. Located at the end. In the normal state of the four connection arms 3567, the distal end holes 3567a are separated from the proximal end pin 3567b in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 134 (c) and the like).

  In this normal state (see FIG. 135 (a) and the like), when the rotation drive gear 3554 is rotated clockwise in front view by the rear bottom rotation drive motor 3553, the connection ring 3560 is joined together with the drive gear member 3559. Will rotate in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. When the connecting ring 3560 rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the connecting arm 3567 is connected via the proximal pin 3567b attached to the mounting hole 3560a, and the distal end hole 3567a of the connecting arm 3567 is connected to the decorative body slider. The slide pin 3566a attached to the distal end hole 3560a moves from the guide slit 3561d of the rotary decorative body base 3561 attached via the slide pin 3566a of the 3566a to the guide slit 3561d. At the center of rotation.

  However, in this normal state, the slide pin 3566a is located at the end on the rotation center side of the guide slit 3561d, and cannot slide further to the rotation center side. Accordingly, the connecting arm 3567 pulls the rotary decorative body base 3561 through the guide slit 3561d so as to rotate in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front. Since the rotational resistance of the rotary damper member 3565 acts on the rotary decorative body base 3561 via the differential gear member 3562, the differential transmission gear 3563, and the damper gear 3564, the rotational resistance of the rotary damper member 3565 is prevented. As a result, the rotating decorative body base 3561 rotates in the counterclockwise direction.

  When the rotating decorative body base 3561 rotates in the counterclockwise direction on the front, the slide pin 3566a of the decorative body slider 3566 is positioned at the rotation center side end of the guide slit 3561d. The back-and-under rotation decoration 3568 attached to 3566 is rotated toward the center of rotation and in contact with each other (see FIG. 135 (b)). In addition, during rotation of the four rear lower back decorations 3568 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the connection arm 3567 attaches to the decoration slider 3566 to which the rear lower rotation decoration 3568 is attached by the connecting arm 3567. Since the force for sliding is applied, the back decoration 3568 does not slide outward due to centrifugal force.

  On the other hand, in a normal state (see FIG. 136 (a) and the like), when the rotation drive gear 3554 is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the rear bottom rotation drive motor 3553, it is connected together with the drive gear member 3559. Ring 3560 will rotate in a clockwise direction. When this connection ring 3560 is to be rotated in the clockwise direction, the connection arm 3567 is moved through the base pin 3567b attached to the attachment hole 3560a, and the distal end hole 3567a of the connection arm 3567 is slid on the decorative body slider 3566. The slide pin 3566a attached to the distal end hole 3560a is moved through the guide slit 3561d because the slide pin 3566a attached to the tip hole 3560a attempts to move in the direction approaching the guide slit 3561d of the rotating decorative body base 3561 attached via the pin 3566a. An attempt is made to rotate the rotating decorative body base 3561 in the clockwise direction.

  However, since the rotational resistance of the rotary damper member 3565 acts on the rotary decorative body base 3561 via the differential gear member 3562, the differential transmission gear 3563, and the damper gear 3564, the rotary decorative body base 3561 rotates clockwise. 136A, the slide pin 3566a moves outward from the center of rotation along the guide slit 3561d (see FIG. 136 (b)). As a result, each slide pin 3566a (decorative body slider 3566) slides outward, so that each back-and-back lower rotational decorative body 3568 slides outward so as to be separated from each other.

  When the connecting ring 3560 further rotates clockwise in front view and the mounting hole 3560a reaches the axis of the guide slit 3561d in the rotary decorative body base 3561, the connecting arm 3567 extends along the guide slit 3561d. At this time, the side surface of the connecting arm 3567 contacts the rotation restricting member 3569, and further rotation of the connecting arm 3567 is prevented. In this state, the decorative body slider 3566 is slid to the outermost position via the connecting arm 3567, and the back and forth rotating decorative bodies 3568 are most separated from each other and open (see FIG. 136 (c)). ). In addition, in a state in which the under-the-bottom rotating decorative body 3568 is open, the under-the-bottom rear fixed decorative body 3573 disposed behind the under-the-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 is visually recognized from between the under-the-bottom rear rotating decorative bodies 3568. (See FIGS. 133 (c) and (d)).

  When the connecting ring 3560 further rotates clockwise in the front view in a state where the back decoration lower rotation decoration body 3568 is opened, the rotation of the connection arm 3567 is restricted by the rotation restricting member 3569. The base 3561 rotates in the clockwise direction against the rotational resistance of the rotary damper member 3565, and rotates in the clockwise direction with the back decoration 3568 opened (see FIG. 136 ( d)). When the rotating decorative body 3568 is opened after the underside, it becomes larger and more conspicuous, which can surprise the player.

  In addition, in the case of closing the back-and-under rear rotation decorative body 3568 in an open state, the connection ring 3567 is rotated by the back-and-back rear rotation drive motor 3553 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, which is opposite to the above. After the lower back, the rotating decorative body 3568 slides toward the center of rotation, and becomes a closed state.

  In this way, the under-bottom-rear-movable effect unit 3500 moves the under-rear-bottom rotating ornamental body 3568 to the ascending end position to move the under-rear-under-rear rotating ornamental body 3568 within the frame of the center role item 2500 (game area 5a). ) Can be moved to the center, and the back decoration 3568 can be made to stand out. In this state, when the back lower back rotating decorative body 3568 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the player can be surprised by rotating at the center of the game area 5a. In addition, when the back lower rotating decorative body 3568 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the lower back rotating decorative body 3568 opens and rotates in a larger state, so that the player can be further surprised. A variety of movable effects can be presented to the player.

[5-9j. Back four corner movable production unit]
Next, the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 145. FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the back four corner movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the back four corner movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the back four corner movable production unit in the back four corner movable production unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 is an exploded view of the back four corner movable unit in the rear four corner movable production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which was seen. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the back four corner movable unit in the back four corner movable effect unit, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 is an exploded view of the back four corner second unit in the back four corner movable effect unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which was seen.

  FIG. 143 (a) is a front view of the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable effect unit in the normal retreat position, and FIG. 143 (b) is a state in which the back four corner first decorative body is in the appearance position. It is a front view of a back four corners first unit, and (c) is a front view of the back four corners first unit in the state of a back four corners second decoration object in an appearance position. Further, FIG. 144 (a) is an explanatory view showing, from the left side, the state of the drive mechanism when the back four corner first decorative body is in the retracted position in the back four corner first unit, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism in the middle of the back four corners 1st decoration body from the retreat position to an appearance position from a left side surface, (c) is a back four corners 1st decoration unit in a back four corners first decoration body of an appearance position. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of the drive mechanism at the time when viewed from the left side. FIG. 145 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing, from the left side, the state of the drive mechanism when the back four corner second decorative body is in the retracted position in the back four corner first unit, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism in the middle of the back four corner second decoration body from the retreat position to the appearance position from the left side surface, and (c) is a back four corner second decoration body in the back four corner first unit in the appearance position. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of the driving mechanism at the time from the left side.

  The four back corner movable effect units 3600 are attached to the four corners outside the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The four back corner movable effect units 3600 are four back corner first units 3610 attached to the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the four corners in the back box 3010, and the back four corner second units attached to the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the four corners in the back box 3010. 3650. The back four corner first unit 3610B attached to the lower left corner is attached to the back four corner first unit 3610A attached to the upper right corner while being rotated by 180 degrees around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. The back four corner second unit 3650B attached to the lower right corner is attached to the rear four corner second unit 3650A attached to the upper left corner by being rotated by 180 degrees around the axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  Hereinafter, the back four corner first unit 3610 (3610A) attached to the upper right corner and the back four corner second unit 3650 (3650A) attached to the upper left corner will be described, and the back four corner first unit 3610 (3610B) attached to the lower left corner. ) And the back four corner second unit 3650 (3650B) attached to the lower right corner are rotated only 180 degrees with respect to those attached to the upper right corner and the upper left corner, and therefore description thereof is omitted.

  First, as shown in FIG. 139 and FIG. 140, the back four corner first unit 3610 is mounted in the back box 3010 and has a shallow box-shaped unit base 3611 opened at the rear and lower sides, and a front surface of the unit base 3611. A shallow box-shaped motor base 3612 which is attached to the approximate center in the left-right direction and is open on the left side (the one facing the center in the left-right direction of the back box 3010), and is attached to the left side surface of the motor base 3612. The motor base 3612 is mounted on the left side of the motor base 3612 at the front of the motor base cover 3613 which covers the front side of the open left side surface of the motor base 3612 from the substantially center in the front-rear direction, and behind the motor base cover front 3613. A box-shaped motor base cover rear 3614 that is open on the right and front, and a right side surface of the motor base 3612 The back four corner drive motor 3615 which is attached to the front part and has a rotation axis protruding into the motor base 3612, and is attached to the rotation axis of the back four corner drive motor 3615 so that the left side is covered by the motor base cover front 3613. And a transmission member 3616 housed in the motor base 3612.

  The transmission member 3616 includes a cylindrical mounting shaft portion 3616a mounted on the rotation shaft of the back four corner drive motor 3615, a disk-shaped base portion 3616b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the tip of the mounting shaft portion 3616a, and a base. A detecting piece 3616c protruding rightward from a surface facing rightward in the portion 3616b, a first transmitting portion 3617 provided on a surface facing leftward of the base portion 3616b, and a base portion. And a second transmitting portion 3618 provided on a surface of the right side of 3616b.

  The first transmission portion 3617 of the transmission member 3616 includes a cylindrical first transmission pin 3617a protruding leftward from the vicinity of the periphery of the base portion 3616b in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3616b, and a revolution of the first transmission pin 3617a. A cylindrical first lock protrusion 3617b projecting concentrically leftward from the left surface of the base portion 3616b with a radius smaller than the radius, and a first lock protrusion 3617b and a first transmission pin 3617a. Notch in a fan shape from an even range to the center of the first lock projection 3617b on both sides with the axis connecting the center of the base 3616b and the center of the first transmission pin 3617a on the outer peripheral surface of the one lock projection 3617b. And a first notch 3617c.

  The second transmission portion 3618 of the transmission member 3616 includes a cylindrical second transmission pin 3618a protruding rightward in the vicinity of the periphery of the base portion 3616b in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3616b, and a revolving motion of the second transmission pin 3618a. A cylindrical second lock protrusion 3618b projecting concentrically rightward from the right surface of the base portion 3616b with a radius smaller than the radius, and a second lock protrusion 3618b and a second transmission pin 3618a. A fan-shaped notch is formed from an even range on both sides with an axis connecting the center of the base portion 3616b and the center of the second transmission pin 3618a on the outer peripheral surface of the second lock projection 3618b toward the center of the second lock projection 3618b. And a second notch 3618c formed therein.

  In the transmission member 3616, the orbital radii of the first transmission pin 3617a and the second transmission pin 3618a are the same. In addition, the second transmission pin 3618a protrudes from the first transmission pin 3617a from a position rotated by 180 degrees about the rotation axis of the base portion 3616b. Further, the diameters of the first lock projection 3617b and the second lock projection 3618b are the same. Further, the transmission member 3616 is configured such that the first notch 3617c of the first transmission portion 3617 and the second notch 3618c of the second transmission portion 3618 are formed around the first lock projection 3617b and the second lock projection 3618b. On the other hand, it is formed in a fan shape in an angle range of 72 degrees.

  In addition, the first unit 3610 at the back four corners is a columnar transmitted shaft member 3619 having both ends attached to the motor base 3612 and the rear of the motor base cover 3614 at positions rearward of the transmitting member 3616, and a transmitted shaft. It has a working arm 3620a which is rotatably mounted by the member 3619 penetrating therethrough, rotates by transmitting the rotation of the transmitting member 3616 from the first transmitting portion 3617, and extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. A first transmitted member 3620, a link shaft member 3621 having both ends attached to the motor base 3612 and the motor base cover rear 3614 below the first transmitted member 3620 immediately below the transmitted shaft member 3619. The link shaft member 3621 is rotatably mounted by penetrating the base end side. A link arm 3622 extending in the direction perpendicular to the same length as the operation arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620, and an upper end rotatably attached to the tip of the operation arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620. The link arm 3622 is rotatably mounted such that the link arm 3622 extends below the upper end of the link arm 3622 in parallel with the operation arm 3620a. A back four corner first decorative body 3624 attached to the front side and imitating a shuriken, and a back four corner first decorative board 3625 mounted on the back side of the back four corner first decorative body 3624 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side And

  The first transmitted member 3620 has a shaft portion 3620b through which a working arm 3620a extends from the left end and a transmitted shaft member 3619 penetrates, and extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis from the right end of the shaft portion 3620b. A disc-shaped first transmitted main body 3620c, a first transmission slit 3620d that is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body 3620c toward the center and into which the first transmission pin 3617a is slidably inserted; On both sides of the first transmission slit 3620d on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body 3620c, a pair of first lock concave portions 3620e that are concave in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center are provided.

  The direction in which the first transmission slit 3620d opens on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body 3620c is substantially the same as the direction in which the operation arm 3620a extends. The first lock concave portion 3620e is recessed by an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the first lock protrusion 3617b of the first transmission portion 3617. Further, the pair of first lock recesses 3620e are formed such that lines connecting the centers of the respective concave arcs and the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3620 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  The first transmitted member 3620 has the first transmitted main body 3620 c and the first transmission pin 3617 a of the first transmitting section 3617 when the rear four corner first unit 3610 (the rear four corner movable rendering unit 3600) is assembled. The position in the left-right direction is the same as that of the first lock projection 3617b. Accordingly, the first transmission pin 3617a can be inserted into the first transmission slit 3620d, and rotation can be transmitted through the first transmission pin 3617a and the first transmission slit 3620d. Further, a part of the first lock protrusion 3617b can be inserted into the first lock recess 3620e, and the first lock protrusion 3617b is inserted into the first lock recess 3620e, so that the first lock protrusion 3617b is inserted. The rotation of the transmitted member 3620 can be restricted (locked).

  To the link member 3623, the tip of the operation arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620 and the tip of the link arm 3622 are rotatably attached by link pins 3626, respectively. Further, a link cover 3627 is attached to an upper part of the front surface of the link member 3623. The back four corner first unit 3610 forms a parallel link with the motor base 3612, the operation arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620, the link arm 3622, and the link member 3623, and the first transmitted member 3620 , The back four corner first decorative body 3624 can be moved up and down via the link member 3623.

  Further, the back four corner first unit 3610 has a flat base cover 3628 which closes the rear end opening of the unit base 3611 and is attached to the unit base 3611, and a columnar transmitted shaft member extending right and left. It has a second action pin 3629a that revolves around 3619, and is rotatably mounted by the transmission shaft member 3619 penetrating between the motor base 3612 and the first transmission member 3620. The second transmitted member 3629 which rotates by transmitting the rotation from the second transmitting portion 3618 in the transmitting member 3616, and revolves around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the revolution of the second operating pin 3629a of the second transmitted member 3629. It has a first connecting pin 3630a that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape, and has a unit base behind the transmitted shaft member 3619. A rotation connecting member 3630 rotatably mounted by the base 3611 and the base cover 3628, and a rotatable mounting around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the unit base 3611 and the base cover 3628 below the rotation connecting member 3630. And a second decorative base 3631 having four back corners having second connecting pins 3631a protruding rearward in a columnar shape at a position eccentric from the center of rotation.

  In addition, the back four corners first unit 3610 has one end side rotatably attached to the first connection pin 3630a of the rotary connection member 3630, and the opposite end side of the back four corners second decorative body base 3631. A band-shaped connecting arm 3632 rotatably attached to the second connecting pin 3631a, and a back four corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the front surface of the back four corner second decorative body base 3631 and extending in an arc shape. A back four corner second decorative board 3634 attached to the rear surface of the back four corner second decorative body 3633 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; and a rear face near the front end of the back four corner second decorative body 3633. A board cover 3635 covering the rear four corners of the second decorative board 3634 and a detection piece 36 of the transmission member 3616 attached to the motor base 3612. A back corner lift detection sensor 3636 that can detect 6c, and a.

  The second transmitted member 3629 includes a disc-shaped second transmitted main body 3629b centered on the transmitted shaft member 3619, and a second transmitted main body 3629b. A second transmission slit 3629c which is recessed from the outer peripheral surface toward the center and into which the second transmission pin 3618a is slidably inserted, and on both sides of the second transmission slit 3629c on the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body 3629b. And a pair of second lock recesses 3629d that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  The direction in which the second transmission slit 3629c of the second transmitted member 3629 is opened on the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body 3629b faces in the direction opposite to the second operation pin 3629a with the transmitted shaft member 3619 interposed therebetween. It is suitable. The second lock recess 3629d is recessed by an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the second lock protrusion 3618b of the second transmission portion 3618. Further, the pair of second lock recesses 3629d are formed such that lines connecting the centers of the respective concave arcs and the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3629 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  The second transmitted member 3629 has the second transmitted main body 3629 b and the second transmitted pin 3618 a of the second transmitted portion 3618 when the rear four corner first unit 3610 (the rear four corner movable effect unit 3600) is assembled. The position in the left-right direction is the same as the second lock projection 3618b. Accordingly, the second transmission pin 3618a can be inserted into the second transmission slit 3629c, and rotation can be transmitted through the second transmission pin 3618a and the second transmission slit 3629c. In addition, a part of the second lock protrusion 3618b can be inserted into the second lock recess 3629d, and the second lock protrusion 3618b is inserted into the second lock recess 3629d, so that the second lock protrusion 3618b can be inserted. The rotation of the transmitted member 3629 can be restricted (locked).

  The rotary connection member 3630 extends in a fan shape from the center of rotation in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and a flat main body 3630b in which the first connection pin 3630a protrudes rearward from the peripheral edge of the rear surface. A protruding piece 3630c protruding in a shape and a part of the protruding piece 3630c are cut out so that the second working pin 3629a of the second transmitted member 3629 is slidably inserted from the front end to the rear. And a second affected part 3630d.

  The rotation connecting member 3630 has a rotation center mounted at the same height as the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3629. As the second transmission member 3629 rotates and the second operation pin 3629a revolves, the second connection portion 3630d is pressed by the second operation pin 3629a and rotates.

  The back four corner second decorative body 3633 is formed in a shape imitating the cutting edge of a cutting tool such as a shuriken or a sword, and the thinned side of the blade is attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3631.

  The back four corner first unit 3610 forms a rotation link with the base cover 3628, the rotation connection member 3630, the back four corner second decorative body base 3631, and the connection arm 3632, and when the rotation connection member 3630 rotates. Then, the second decorative body base 3631 on the back four corners rotates in the same direction via the connecting arm 3632. Thus, the back four corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3631 can be rotated (rotated) such that the tip side thereof faces downward.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 141 and 142 and the like, the back four corner second unit 3650 is attached to the inside of the back box 3010 and has a shallow box-shaped unit base 3651 opened at the rear and the lower side. A shallow box-shaped motor base 3652 which is attached at the approximate center in the left-right direction on the front surface and is open on the right (the one facing the center in the left-right direction of the back box 3010), and is attached to the right side of the motor base 3652. The motor base 3652 is mounted on the right side of the motor base 3652 in front of the motor base cover 3653 which covers the front side of the open right side of the motor base 3652 from substantially the center in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped motor base cover rear 3654 that is open at the left and front of the cage, and a left side of the motor base 3652. And a rear four-corner drive motor 3655 having a rotating shaft protruding into the motor base 3652 and a rotating shaft of the back four-corner drive motor 3655, and the right side is covered by a motor base cover front 3653. Transmission member 3656 housed in the motor base 3652 as described above.

  The transmission member 3656 includes a cylindrical mounting shaft portion 3656a mounted on the rotating shaft of the back four corner drive motor 3655, a disk-shaped base portion 3656b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the tip of the mounting shaft portion 3656a, and a base. A detecting piece 3656c projecting rightward from a surface facing rightward in the portion 3656b, a first transmitting portion 3657 provided on a surface facing rightward of the base portion 3656b, and a base portion. And a second transmission portion 3658 provided on the left-side surface of 3656b.

  The first transmission portion 3657 of the transmission member 3656 includes a cylindrical first transmission pin 3657a protruding rightward from the vicinity of the periphery of the base portion 3656b in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3656b, and a revolution of the first transmission pin 3657a. A cylindrical first lock protrusion 3657b projecting concentrically rightward from the right surface of the base portion 3656b with a radius smaller than the radius, and a first lock protrusion 3657b and a first transmission pin 3657a. A fan-shaped notch is formed from an even range on both sides of an axis connecting the center of the base portion 3656b and the center of the first transmission pin 3657a on the outer peripheral surface of the one lock projection 3657b toward the center of the first lock projection 3657b. And a first notch 3657c.

  The second transmitting portion 3658 of the transmitting member 3656 includes a cylindrical second transmitting pin 3658a protruding leftward in the vicinity of the periphery of the base portion 3656b in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3656b, and a revolving motion of the second transmitting pin 3658a. A cylindrical second lock projection 3658b projecting concentrically to the left from the left surface of the base portion 3656b with a radius smaller than the radius, and a second lock projection 3658b and a second transmission pin 3658a. A fan-shaped notch is formed from an even range on both sides of an axis connecting the center of the base portion 3656b and the center of the second transmission pin 3658a on the outer peripheral surface of the second lock projection 3658b toward the center of the second lock projection 3658b. And a second notch 3658c formed therein.

  In the transmission member 3656, the orbital radii of the first transmission pin 3657a and the second transmission pin 3658a are the same. Further, the second transmission pin 3658a protrudes from a position rotated by 180 degrees about the rotation axis of the base portion 3656b with respect to the first transmission pin 3657a. Further, the diameters of the first lock protrusion 3657b and the second lock protrusion 3658b are the same. Further, the transmission member 3656 is configured such that the first notch portion 3657c of the first transmission portion 3657 and the second notch portion 3658c of the second transmission portion 3658 are formed around the first lock protrusion 3657b and the second lock protrusion 3658b. On the other hand, it is formed in a fan shape in an angle range of 72 degrees.

  In addition, the rear four corner second unit 3650 includes a columnar transmitted shaft member 3659 having both ends attached to the motor base 3652 and the motor base cover rear 3654 at positions rearward of the transmission member 3656, and a transmitted shaft. It has a working arm 3660a that is rotatably mounted by the member 3659 penetrating therethrough, rotates by transmitting rotation from the first transmitting portion 3657 of the transmitting member 3656, and extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. A first transmitted member 3660, and a link shaft member 3661 having both ends attached to the motor base 3652 and the motor base cover rear 3654 below the first transmitted member 3660 immediately below the transmitted shaft member 3659. The link shaft member 3661 is rotatably mounted by penetrating the base end side. A link arm 3662 extending in the direction perpendicular to the same length as the operation arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660, and an upper end rotatably attached to the tip of the operation arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660. The link arm 3662 is rotatably mounted so that the link arm 3662 extends in parallel with the operation arm 3660a below the upper end, and a link member 3663 extending downward and a lower end of the link member 3663 extend downward. A back four corner first decorative body 3664 attached to the front surface and imitating a shuriken, and a back four corner first decorative substrate 3665 mounted to the rear surface of the back four corner first decorative body 3664 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface And

  The first transmitted member 3660 has a shaft portion 3660b through which a working arm 3660a extends from the left end and a transmitted shaft member 3659 penetrates, and extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis from the right end of the shaft portion 3660b. A disc-shaped first transmitted main body 3660c, a first transmission slit 3660d which is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body 3660c toward the center and into which the first transmission pin 3657a is slidably inserted; On both sides of the first transmission slit 3660d on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body portion 3660c, there are provided a pair of first lock concave portions 3660e that are concave in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  The direction in which the first transmission slit 3660d opens on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body 3660c is substantially the same as the direction in which the operation arm 3660a extends. The first lock recess 3660e is recessed by an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the first lock protrusion 3657b of the first transmission portion 3657. The pair of first lock recesses 3660e are formed such that lines connecting the centers of the respective concave arcs and the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3660 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In a state where the back four corner second unit 3650 (the back four corner movable rendering unit 3600) is assembled, the first transmitted member 3660 is configured such that the first transmitted main body portion 3660c is connected to the first transmission pin 3657a of the first transmission portion 3657 and The position in the left-right direction is the same as the first lock protrusion 3657b. Thus, the first transmission pin 3657a can be inserted into the first transmission slit 3660d, and rotation can be transmitted through the first transmission pin 3657a and the first transmission slit 3660d. Further, a part of the first lock protrusion 3657b can be inserted into the first lock recess 3660e, and the first lock protrusion 3657b is inserted into the first lock recess 3660e, so that the first lock protrusion 3657b is inserted. The rotation of the transmitted member 3660 can be restricted (locked).

  To the link member 3663, the tip of the operation arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660 and the tip of the link arm 3662 are rotatably attached by link pins 3666, respectively. Further, a link cover 3667 is attached to an upper part of the front surface of the link member 3663. The back four corner second unit 3650 forms a parallel link with the motor base 3652, the operation arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660, the link arm 3662, and the link member 3663, and the first transmitted member 3660 By rotating the first decorative body 3664 on the back four corners via the link member 3663, it can be moved up and down.

  Further, the second unit 3650 at the back four corners closes the rear end opening of the unit base 3651 and has a flat base cover 3668 attached to the unit base 3651, and a columnar transmission shaft member extending left and right. It has a second action pin 3669a that revolves around 3659, and is rotatably mounted by penetrating a transmitted shaft member 3659 between the motor base 3652 and the first transmitted member 3660. The second transmitted member 3669, which rotates by transmitting the rotation from the second transmitting portion 3658 in the transmitting member 3656, and revolves around an axis extending in the front-rear direction due to the revolution of the second operating pin 3669a of the second transmitted member 3669. And a first connecting pin 3670a extending rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a unit base behind the transmitted shaft member 3659. A rotation connecting member 3670 rotatably mounted by the screw 3651 and the base cover 3668, and a rotatable mounting around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the unit base 3651 and the base cover 3668 below the rotation connecting member 3670. And a second decoration base 3671 at the back four corners having a second connection pin 3671a protruding rearward in a columnar shape at a position eccentric from the center of rotation.

  Further, the back four corner second unit 3650 has one end side rotatably attached to the first connection pin 3670a of the rotary connection member 3670, and the opposite end side of the back four corner second decorative body base 3671. A strip-shaped connecting arm 3672 rotatably attached to the second connecting pin 3671a, and a back four corner second decorative body 3673 attached to the front surface of the back four corner second decorative body base 3671 and extending in an arc shape. A back four corner second decorative board 3674 attached to the back of the back four corner second decorative body 3673 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a back face near the tip of the back four corner second decorative body 3673 A board cover 3675 covering the rear part of the second decorative board 367 at the four back corners, and a detection piece 36 of the transmission member 3656 attached to the motor base 3652. A back corner lift detection sensor 3676 that can detect 6c, and a.

  The second transmitted member 3669 includes a disc-shaped second transmitted main body portion 3669b centered on the transmitted shaft member 3659, and a second transmitted main body portion 3669b. A second transmission slit 3669c which is recessed from the outer peripheral surface toward the center and into which the second transmission pin 3658a is slidably inserted, and on both sides of the second transmission slit 3669c on the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body 3669b. , And a pair of second lock recesses 3669d that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  The direction in which the second transmission slit 3669c of the second transmitted member 3669 is opened on the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body 3669b is opposite to the direction of the second working pin 3669a with the transmitted shaft member 3659 interposed therebetween. It is suitable. The second lock concave portion 3669d is recessed by an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the second lock protrusion 3658b of the second transmission portion 3658. In addition, the pair of second lock recesses 3669d are formed such that lines connecting the centers of the respective concave arcs and the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3669 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In a state where the second unit 3650 (the four back corner movable effect unit 3600) is assembled, the second transmitted member 3669 is configured such that the second transmitted main body 3669b is connected to the second transmission pin 3658a of the second transmission unit 3658 and The position in the left-right direction is the same as the second lock protrusion 3658b. Accordingly, the second transmission pin 3658a can be inserted into the second transmission slit 3669c, and rotation can be transmitted through the second transmission pin 3658a and the second transmission slit 3669c. In addition, a part of the second lock protrusion 3658b can be inserted into the second lock recess 3669d, and the second lock protrusion 3658b can be inserted into the second lock recess 3669d, so that the second lock protrusion 3658b is inserted. The rotation of the transmitted member 3669 can be restricted (locked).

  The rotation connection member 3670 extends from the center of rotation in a fan shape in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and a flat main body 3670b having a first connection pin 3670a protruding rearward from a peripheral edge of a rear surface. And a part of the protruding piece 3670c is cut out so that the second working pin 3669a of the second transmitted member 3669 is slidably inserted from the front end toward the rear. And a second affected part 3670d.

  The rotation connecting member 3670 has a rotation center mounted at the same height as the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3669. When the second transmission member 3669 rotates and the second operation pin 3669a revolves, the rotation connection member 3670 rotates when the second operation portion 3670d is pressed by the second operation pin 3669a.

  The back four corner second decorative body 3673 is formed in a shape imitating the cutting edge of a knife such as a shuriken or a sword, and the thinned side of the blade is attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3671.

  The back four corner second unit 3650 forms a rotation link with the base cover 3668, the rotation connection member 3670, the back four corner second decorative body base 3671, and the connection arm 3672, and when the rotation connection member 3670 rotates. Then, the rear four corner second decorative body base 3671 rotates in the same direction via the connecting arm 3672. Thus, the back four corner second decorative body 3673 attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3671 can be rotated (rotated) so that the tip side thereof is directed downward.

  Subsequently, operations of the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 and the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 in the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. In the back four corner movable effect unit 3600, the back four corner first unit 3610 and the back four corner second unit 3650 are composed of the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673, the back four corner second decorative boards 3634 and 3675, and the board covers 3635 and 3675. , Except that the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673, the back four corner second decorative substrates 3634 and 3675, and the substrate covers 3635 and 3675 are formed point symmetrically. Therefore, only the back four corner first unit 3610 (3610A) at the upper right corner in the front view will be described here, and the description of the other back four corner first unit 3610B and the back four corner second unit 3650 will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 143 (a) and the like, the back four corners first decorative body 3624 moving up and down is approaching the unit base 3611 as shown in FIG. 143 (a) and the like. At the same time, the rotating back four corner second decorative body 3633 is in a state of extending horizontally. In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the back four-corner first decorative body 3624 and the back four-corner second decorative body 3633 are located at the retreat positions where they are almost invisible from the player side.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIGS. 144 (a) and 145 (a), in the transmission member 3616, the first transmission pin 3617a of the first transmission portion 3617 is located immediately above the rotation center, and The second transmission pin 3618a of the second transmission portion 3618 is located immediately below the rotation center. In a normal state, the operation arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620 extends diagonally upward and forward, and the first transmission slit 3620d opens diagonally upward and forward, and the first transmission slit 3620d The first lock protrusion 3617b of the first transmission portion 3617 is inserted into the first lock recess 3620e below the first lock recess 3620e. Thereby, the first decorative body 3624 on the four back corners is located at the rising end via the link member 3623, and the first transmitted member 3620 is locked so as not to rotate.

  In a normal state, in the second transmitted member 3629, the second action pin 3629a is positioned obliquely upward and rearward with respect to the center of rotation, and the second transmission slit 3629c opens obliquely downward and forward. The second lock projection 3618b of the second transmission portion 3618 is inserted into the second lock recess 3629d above the second transmission slit 3629c. Thus, the back four corner second decoration body 3633 extends substantially horizontally via the rotation connection member 3630, the connection arm 3632, and the back four corner second decoration body base 3631, and the second transmitted member 3629 cannot rotate. Locked. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 is detected by the back four corner elevation detection sensors 3636.

  In this normal state, when the transmission member 3616 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the back four corner drive motor 3615 so that the first transmission pin 3617a of the first transmission portion 3617 moves backward, the first The transmission pin 3617a revolves so as to move backward and enters the first transmission slit 3620d of the first transmitted member 3620, and at the same time, the first lock projection 3617b is disengaged from the inside of the first lock recess 3620e, and the lock is released. The first transmitted member 3620 is released and becomes rotatable. In addition, the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 revolves, and the back four corner elevation detection sensors 3636 are in a non-detection state. When the first transmission pin 3617a further revolves in the counterclockwise direction, the first transmission pin 3617a presses the inner surface of the first transmission slit 3620d downward, and the first transmitted member 3620 pushes the transmitted shaft member 3619. It will rotate clockwise around the center.

  When the first transmitted member 3620 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the tip of the operation arm 3620a extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis rotates so as to move downward, so that the operation arm 3620a The four back corner first decorative bodies 3624 are moved downward via the link members 3623 attached to the tips (see FIG. 144 (b)). At this time, since the link member 3623 is attached by the parallel link of the action arm 3620a and the link arm 3622, the first four decorative corners 3624 on the back move downward in the same posture.

  On the other hand, in the second transmitting portion 3618 of the transmitting member 3616, the second transmitting pin 3618a revolves in the direction away from the second transmitted member 3629, and the second lock projection 3618b is inserted into the second lock concave portion 3629d. Therefore, the second transmitted member 3629 does not rotate, and the second decorative body 3633 at the four back corners does not rotate from the retracted position.

  When the first transmission pin 3617a further revolves in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the left side and comes off the first transmission slit 3620d, the rotation of the first transmitted member 3620 stops, and the back four corner first decorations The downward movement of the body 3624 stops (see FIGS. 143 (b) and 144 (c)). When the first transmission pin 3617a is disengaged from the first transmission slit 3620d, the first lock projection 3617b enters the first lock recess 3620e above the first transmission slit 3620d, and the first lock projection 3617b causes the first lock projection 3617b to enter the first lock projection 3617b. The rotation of one transmitted member 3620 is locked. Therefore, the first transmitted member 3620 does not rotate in the clockwise direction any more, and the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 are kept stopped. In this state, as shown in FIG. 154, the four back corner first decorative bodies 3624 are located within the frame of the center role 2500 and can be visually recognized from the player side. That is, the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 are in the appearance position.

  When the transmission member 3616 is rotated in the opposite direction (the clockwise direction in the left side view) by the back four corner drive motor 3615 in a state where the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 are in the appearance position, the reverse of the above is performed. By operating, the first transmitted member 3620 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 are raised via the action arm 3620a, and return to the normal state (the state of the retracted position). Then, when the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 is detected by the back four corners up / down detection sensor 3636, the rotation (drive) of the back four corner drive motor 3615 stops. In the present embodiment, in the transmission member 3616 (first transmission portion 3617), the rotation range in which the first transmission pin 3617a is inserted into the first transmission slit 3620d is the first specific rotation range.

  The back four corner first unit 3610 is in a normal state (the state shown in FIG. 145 (a)), and the transmission member 3616 is moved by the back four corner drive motor 3615 so that the second transmission pin 3618a of the second transmission part 3618 moves rearward. When rotated in a clockwise direction in a left side view, the second transmission pin 3618a revolves to move rearward, enters the second transmission slit 3629c of the second transmitted member 3629, and simultaneously The lock projection 3618b is released from the inside of the second lock concave portion 3629d, the lock is released, and the second transmitted member 3629 becomes rotatable. In addition, the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 revolves, and the back four corner elevation detection sensors 3636 are in a non-detection state. Then, when the second transmission pin 3618a revolves further clockwise, the second transmission pin 3618a presses the inner surface of the second transmission slit 3629c upward, and the second transmitted member 3629 is centered on the transmitted shaft member 3619. , And rotate in the counterclockwise direction.

  When the second transmitted member 3629 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the left side, the second working pin 3629a of the second transmitted member 3629 revolves to move downward, and the second working pin 3629a moves below the second working pin 3629a. With the movement of the rotation connection member 3630, the rotation connection member 3630 rotates around the axis extending in the front-rear direction (counterclockwise direction in front view) such that the second affected part 3630d of the rotation connection member 3630 moves downward. Then, when the rotation connecting member 3630 rotates, the back four corner second decorative body bases 3631 connected by the connecting arm 3632 rotate in the same direction as the rotary connecting member 3630, and are attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3631. The four back corner second decorative bodies 3633 also rotate in the same direction (the direction in which the tip side moves downward, that is, the direction around anti-hemismesis in front view) (see FIG. 145 (d)).

  on the other hand, In the first transmission portion 3617 of the transmission member 3616, While the first transmission pin 3617a revolves in a direction away from the first transmitted member 3620, The first lock projection 3617b is inserted into the first lock recess 3620e, The first transmitted member 3620 does not rotate, and the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 do not move from the retracted position.

  Then, when the second transmission pin 3618a further revolves clockwise in the left side view and comes off the second transmission slit 3629c, the rotation of the second transmitted member 3629 stops, and the back four corner second decorative body The downward rotation of the tip side of 3633 stops (see FIG. 143 (c) and FIG. 145 (c)). When the second transmission pin 3618a is disengaged from the second transmission slit 3629c, the second lock projection 3618b enters the second lock recess 3629d above the second transmission slit 3629c, and the second lock projection 3618b causes the second lock projection 3618b to enter the second lock projection 3618b. The rotation of the second transmitted member 3629 is locked. Therefore, the second transmitted member 3629 does not further rotate in the counterclockwise direction, and the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 are maintained in a state where the rotation is stopped. In this state, as shown in FIG. 143 (c), the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 are inclined about 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and as shown in FIG. 153, the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 are in the center. It can be visually recognized from the player side through the frame of the accessory 2500. That is, the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 are in the appearance position.

  When the back four corner drive motor 3615 rotates the transmission member 3616 in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in left side view) with the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 in the appearance position, the reverse of the above is performed. The second transmitted member 3629 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the above operation, and the four back corner second decorative bodies 3633 are rotated via the rotation connecting member 3630 and the connecting arm 3632 so that the tip side thereof rises. Then, it returns to the normal state (the state of the retreat position). Then, when the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 is detected by the back four corners up / down detection sensor 3636, the rotation (drive) of the back four corner drive motor 3615 stops. In the present embodiment, in the transmission member 3616 (second transmission portion 3618), the rotation range in which the second transmission pin 3618a is inserted into the second transmission slit 3629c is the second specific rotation range.

  As described above, the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 causes the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 to appear and the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 to appear by the rotation of one back four corner drive motors 3615 and 3655. And the back four corner first unit 3610A of the upper right corner, the back four corner first unit 3610B of the lower left corner, the back four corner second unit 3650A of the upper left corner, and the back four corner second unit 3650B of the lower right corner, Since each of them can be operated independently and separately, a more versatile movable effect can be presented to the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-10. Movable effects on gaming boards]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 146 to 154. FIG. 146 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the front movable decorative body of the front movable effect unit in the center role. FIG. 147 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back upper decorative body of the upper back movable effect unit in the back unit is in the first appearance position, and FIG. 148 is the upper back decoration of the upper back movable effect unit in the back unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the body is in the second appearance position, and the first backside lower decorative body and the lower backside second decorative body of the lower back front movable rendering unit are in the appearance position.

  FIG. 149 shows a pair of shutters opened with the first decoration surface of the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable rendering unit in the back unit facing forward, and a back left rotation of the back left movable rendering unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of the appearance position where the back left protruding decorative body appears with the first decorative surface of the decorative body facing forward. Further, FIG. 150 is a game board showing the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable rendering unit and the back left rotating decorative body of the back left movable rendering unit in the back unit with their respective second decorative surfaces facing forward. FIG. FIG. 151 is a game board showing the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable rendering unit and the back left rotating decorative body of the back left movable rendering unit in the back unit with their respective third decorative surfaces facing forward. FIG.

  Further, FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-and-under rear movable decoration of the back and back movable effect unit in the back unit is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in front view at the rising end position. In addition, FIG. 153 shows that the back and back rotating decorative body of the back and back movable effect unit in the back unit is rotated clockwise in the front view at the rising end position, and the back and four corners of the back four corner movable effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of the decoration body in the appearance position. FIG. 154 is a front view of the game board showing the back four corner first decorative bodies of the back four corner movable effect unit in the back unit in the appearance position.

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 disposed rearward through the frame of the center role object 2500 can be visually recognized from the player side. can do. In the normal state, the top movable decoration 2561 of the top movable effect unit 2560 in the center role 2500 is raised, and the first rotary decoration 2572 and the second rotary decoration of the front movable effect unit 2570 are raised. The body 2573 and the third rotating decorative body 2574 have stopped rotating. Further, in the normal state, the back upper decorative body 3152 of the back upper movable effecting unit 3100 is located in a retracted position above and behind the frame of the center role object 2500 in a state where the top and bottom are reversed, and a part thereof is provided. It is in a state where it protrudes downward from the upper side in the frame of the center role object 2500 and can be visually recognized from the player side.

  In a normal state, the lower back front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back front second decorative body 3212 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 are located behind the lower side of the center role 2500 and are visible from the player side. It is located in an evacuation position that is difficult to access. In the normal state, the back right rotating decorative body 3310 and the back left rotating decorative body 3410 of the back right movable rendering unit 3300 and the back left movable rendering unit 3400 respectively move the first decorative surfaces 3310a and 3410a forward (front). , And the pair of shutters 3312 of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 are closed, and the two back left projecting decorative bodies 3421 of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 are back left rotating decorative. It is located at a retreat position where it is immersed in the body 3410 invisibly.

  Furthermore, in the normal state, the back decoration 3568 of the back lower movable effect unit 3500 is located at the lower end position, and a part from the lower side of the center role 2500 so as to be visible from the player side. You are in the frame. Also, in the normal state, the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624, 3664 and the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633, 3673 of the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 are located within the frame of the center role 2500 that is difficult to see from the player side. Are also located at the outer evacuation position.

  The gaming board 5 is displayed from the normal state according to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result which is drawn by receiving a game ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Movable staging unit 2560, front and bottom movable staging unit 2570, back upper staging unit 3100, lower back front staging unit 3200, back right mobile staging unit 3300, back left mobile staging unit 3400, back lower staging rear staging unit 3500, and The back four corner movable effect unit 3600 performs a predetermined movable effect.

  Specifically, for example, in the top movable effect unit 2560 of the center role 2500, the top movable decorative body 2561 is lowered from the normal position by the rotation drive of the top drive motor 2563, and the center liquid crystal display device 1500 It is located at the top front (see FIG. 146). This allows the upper part of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 to be covered with the top movable decorative body 2561, thereby making it possible for the player to think that the game state will be changed, and increasing the expectation for the game. be able to.

  Further, in the front and bottom movable effecting unit 2570 of the center role 2500, the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574 are rotated by the lower back drive motor 2575 (FIG. 4). See FIG. 96 (b)). Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that something is good, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game.

  Further, in the back upper movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back upper decoration body 3152 is lowered from the retreat position to the first appearance position by the rotational drive of the back upper drive motor 3103 in a state where the top and bottom are reversed ( See FIG. 147). In this state, the pair of openings 3152a of the upper back decoration 3152 and the sub-decoration 3157a facing the openings 3152a can be partially viewed from the player side through the frame of the center role 2500. it can. Thus, the predetermined character simulated by the upper back decoration 3152 appears to be looking upside down from the top, so that the player can be surprised and entertained by the appearance of the character. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Further, in this state, when the back upper sub-decoration body 3157 is reciprocated left and right by the rotational driving of the back upper sub-drive motor 3159, the pupil of the predetermined character simulated by the back upper decoration body 3152 (sub-decoration 3157a) ) Is swayed to the left and right, so that the player can be further surprised and can enjoy the movable performance.

  In the back upper movable effecting unit 3100, the upper back decoration 3152 is further moved to the second lower appearance position by rotating the back upper drive motor 3103 in a state where the upper back decoration 3152 is in the first appearance position. (See FIG. 148). When the upper back decoration 3152 descends from the first appearance position to the second appearance position, the state of the predetermined character simulated by the back upper decoration 3152 is reversed, and the top and bottom is returned to a normal state. Since it descends while rotating, the movement of the upper back decoration 3152 becomes a dynamic movement, which can strongly attract the player's interest and can greatly surprise the player.

  In the state where the upper back decoration 3152 is in the second appearance position, as shown in the drawing, the top and bottom of the predetermined character simulated by the upper back decoration 3152 is in a normal state, and the upper back decoration 3152 is in the normal state. It is located substantially at the center of the frame of the center role 2500. As a result, the upper back decoration 3152 becomes conspicuous in the game area 5a, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be greatly foreseen that an advantageous game state will occur. . Even in the state of the second appearance position, the pupil of the predetermined character simulated by the back upper decoration body 3152 can be moved right and left by the rotational drive of the back upper sub-drive motor 3159, which makes the player more enjoyable. Can be.

  In the back upper movable effect unit 3100, the back upper decorative body 3152 is moved up and down between the retreat position and the first appearance position, up and down between the first appearance position and the second appearance position, and the retreat position. Can be moved up and down between the second appearance position and the first appearance position or the second appearance position. Various movable effects can be performed by combining them, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

  In the lower back front movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, when the back upper decorative body 3152 of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is at the second appearance position, the back lower front drive motor 3202 rotates to move the back side of the retracted position. The lower front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3212 are moved to the appearance positions located in the frame of the center role 2500 (see FIG. 148). As a result, as shown in the drawing, the lower-front front decorative body 3209 imitating the hand is located in front of the upper back decorative body 3152 imitating the head (face), so that a predetermined character casts a spell. Since the player is in a state as if he / she is tied (like connecting a mark), a strong impact can be given to the player, and the sense of expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state can be further increased.

  Further, in the back right movable rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, the pair of shutters 3312 are separated from each other by a back right shutter solenoid (not shown) in a normal state (a state in which the first decorative surface 3310 stops rotating forward). Then, the inner decorative body 3313 is made to face forward from between the shutters 3312 (see FIG. 149), and the inner decorative body 3313 is illuminated and decorated. Thereby, the arrival of a chance or the like can be suggested to the player.

  In the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right rotary decoration 3310 is rotated by the back right drive motor 3304. Thereby, the player can be made to feel a sign that the game state is changed, and the sense of expectation for the game can be increased to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Also, in the back right movable rendering unit 3300, the back right rotation decorative body 3310 is rotated by the back right drive motor 3304 to stop the second decorative surface 3310b toward the front (front) (see FIG. 150). Thereby, the back right character decoration 3318 of the second decoration surface 3310b can be visually recognized from the player side.

  Furthermore, in the back right movable rendering unit 3300, the back right rotation decorative body 3310 is rotated by the back right drive motor 3304 to stop the third decorative surface 3310c forward (front) (see FIG. 151). Accordingly, the ball guiding member 3322 extending vertically in the back right presentation space 3321 can be visually recognized from the player side. Time, that is, whether the upper winning a prize opening 2006 may be opened, and the sense of expectation for the game can be raised.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, the back left rotating body 3422 is driven by driving the back left decorative body solenoid 3422 in a normal state (a state in which the first decorative surface 3410 stops rotating forward). A back left protruding decorative body 3421 protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the decorative body 3410 (see FIG. 149). By this, the back left projecting decorative body 3421 protrudes from the cylindrical rotating back left rotating decorative body 3410, so that the player can be surprised and think that there is something good. It is possible to increase the expectation for the game.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotary decorative body 3410 is rotated by the rotation of the back left drive motor 3404. Thereby, the player can be made to feel a sign that the game state is changed, and the sense of expectation for the game can be increased to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the back left movable rendering unit 3400, the back left rotation decorative body 3410 is rotated by the back left drive motor 3404 to stop the first decorative surface 3410a toward the front (front) (see FIG. 83 and the like). Since the first decorative surface 3410a is provided with a door decoration 3411 that imitates a door, the shutter 3312 of the first decorative surface 3310a of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 in the back right movable rendering unit 3300 is provided to the player. As in the case of, it can be assumed that the door decoration 3411 is also opened, and the sense of expectation for the game can be increased.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotation decorative body 3410 is rotated by the back left drive motor 3404 to stop the second decorative surface 3410b toward the front (front) (see FIG. 150). This allows the player to visually recognize the back left character decoration 3413 of the second decorative surface 3410b, so that the recognition of the back left character decoration 3413 allows the player to foresee the arrival of a chance.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotation decorative body 3410 is rotated by the back left drive motor 3404 to stop the third decorative surface 3410c toward the front (front) (see FIG. 151). Although illustration is omitted, in this state, when the red light is emitted by the LED of the back left third decorative substrate 3417, the red symbol can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415, and the blue light is emitted. Then, the blue symbol can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415. Thereby, the arrival of a chance or the like can be suggested to the player by the symbol projected on the back left projection unit 3415, and the player can be entertained or have an increased sense of expectation.

  The back right movable rendering unit 3300 and the back left movable rendering unit 3400 rotate the back right rotating decorative body 3310 and the back left rotating decorative body 3410 at the same time, so that the left and right ends (in the frame of the center role product 2500). A movable effect can be performed on the left and right outer sides of the central liquid crystal display device 1500), and the rotating back right rotating decorative body 3310 and the back left rotating decorative body 3410 increase the player's sense of expectation and suppress a decrease in interest. be able to. In addition, by appropriately selecting the decoration surface on which the rotation of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 and the back left rotating decorative body 3410 is stopped, the pattern of the movable effect can be diversified, and the player can be less tired. .

  Further, in the rear-to-back lower movable rendering unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the rear-to-back lower rotary decoration 3568 is rotated by the rear-to-bottom rear elevation drive motor 3512 to raise the rear end lower decorative body 3568 to the substantially center position within the frame of the center role 2500. To rise. Then, when the back-and-bottom rear rotation decorative body 3568 is at the rising end position, the back-and-bottom rear rotation decoration body 3568 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in front view by the back-and-bottom rear rotation drive motor 3553 (see FIG. 152). ). As a result, the back decoration 3568 that is slightly lower and desired to the player side above the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 rises and is positioned at the center of the center role 2500 in the frame. Can be surprised and thought that there is something good, and the expectation for the game can be raised. In addition, by rotating the back decoration 3568 in the counterclockwise direction after rotation, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation of the game.

  Further, in the underside rear movable effect unit 3500, when the backside lower rotation decorative body 3568 is at the rising end position, the backside lower rearward rotation decorative body 3568 is rotated clockwise in front view by the backside lower rotation drive motor 3553. When this is done, the four back-bottom rear-rotating decorative bodies 3568 open and rotate so as to separate from each other and rotate (see FIG. 153). Accordingly, the diameter of the back-and-under rear rotation decorative body 3568 is larger than in the case of rotating counterclockwise, so that the player's expectation of the game can be further increased.

  In the back four corner movable rendering unit 3600 of the back unit 3000, the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624, 3664 are positioned within the frame of the center role object 2500 from the retracted position by the rotational driving of the back four corner drive motors 3615, 3655. It goes up and down to the appearance position (see FIG. 154). Thus, the appearance of the four back four corner first decorative bodies 3624, 3664 can surprise the player and can indicate the arrival of a chance.

  In the back four corner movable effect unit 3600, the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633, 3673 are rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position located in the frame of the center role object 2500 by the rotational driving of the back four corner drive motors 3615, 3655. (See FIG. 153). Thus, the appearance of the four back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 extending radially around the center of the center role 2500 in the frame can surprise the player, and can do something good. It can be thought that there is, and the expectation for the game can be raised. In the back four corner movable rendering unit 3600, the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 are rotated to the appearance position when the rear bottom rotating decoration 3568 of the rear bottom bottom movable rendering unit 3500 is at the rising end position, so that the center is formed. It can be seen that a large shuriken has appeared within the frame of the accessory 2500 (see FIG. 153). As a result, it is possible to convince the player of the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state, to increase the sense of expectation for the game as much as possible, and to enhance the interest in the game.

[6. Game content]
Next, the contents of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 155 is a front view of the game board in which the front component and the front unit are cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area. FIG. 156 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the right portion in the game area in FIG. 155, and FIG. 156 (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line HH in FIG. (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in (a) and showing only a main part, and (d) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in (a) and showing only the main part. It is sectional drawing. Further, FIG. 157 is an explanatory diagram showing, in an enlarged manner, the vicinity of the big winning opening in FIG.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player rotating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 disposed at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the upper center role 2500 which divides the game area 5a into left and right depending on the hitting strength. In addition, the driving strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the rotation amount of the handle lever 504, and the more the ball is rotated clockwise, the stronger it can be hit. That is, game balls can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and a game ball is placed on the obstacle nail. By the contact, the flowing speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nails, a windmill (not shown) which is rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500 to the left in front view from the highest portion, a plurality of obstacle nails not shown. The game ball flows down the left side of the center role item 2500 while contacting the game ball. Then, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500, the game ball passes through the warp passage 2521 and the center of the center role 2500. It is supplied to the left end of the stage 2530 from the warp outlet 2522 opened in the frame.

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 rolls back and forth on the stage 2530 to the left and right, and the side guiding grooves 2532 formed on both sides at the center in the left and right direction in the game area 5a. When the water is discharged forward, the water flows down the area above the starting port unit 2100 below the stage 2530 in the game area 5a. Thereby, there is a possibility that the game ball is accepted in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100.

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is discharged forward from the central guide groove 2531 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a of the stage 2530, the start-up port unit 2100 opened immediately below the central guide groove 2531. The first starting port 2002 has a high probability of being accepted. When game balls are received in the first opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board and the payout control board.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, the game is performed below the center role 2500 by a plurality of obstacle nails and the first shelf 2201a of the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that the vehicle is guided toward the center in the left-right direction in the area 5a and is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, and the like arranged on the downstream side. Then, when a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board and the payout control board.

  In addition, the game ball that has flowed to the left side of the center role 2500 does not flow down to the attacker unit 2300 side due to the lower side of the center role 2500 extending between the starting port unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300. The general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, the lower winning opening 2005, etc. of the attacker unit 2300 are not accepted. In addition, the opening unit 2100 includes a horizontally long rectangular fake portion 2105a similar to the lower winning opening door member 2352 that opens and closes the lower winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2300 below the first opening 2002. Therefore, it is possible to make an illusion that there is a big winning opening below the first starting opening like a conventional pachinko machine.

  On the other hand, the game ball hit into the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters on the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center role 2500 (struck). ), Through the upper right entrance 2540, through the upper gaming space 2541, and the right passage 2542, and from the lower right exit 2543 to the position immediately above the gate portion 2003 in the attacker unit 2300. As a result, a game ball hit so as to flow down the right side of the center role 2500 (right-handed) passes through the gate unit 2003 with extremely high probability. Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 flows down onto the shelf member 2303 through the front of the second starting port 2004 and rolls on the shelf member 2303 to the left as viewed from the front. It is released downward from the left end of the view. The game ball released from the shelf member 2303 flows down on the lower right rail 1005 through the front of the lower big winning opening 2005, rolls on the lower right rail 1005 to the left in front view, and plays the game from the out opening 1111. It is discharged out of the area 5a.

  When the game ball discharged from the lower right exit 2543 flows down on the left side in the front view of the gate section 2003, the second starting port 2004 via the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 and the guiding section 2302b of the starting port front member 2302. Or, there is a possibility that it will be accepted in the lower prize winning opening 2005. On the other hand, when the game ball flows down on the right side of the gate portion 2003 when viewed from the front, it flows down onto the lower right rail 1005 without being accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 and is discharged from the out opening 1111. You.

  Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 while the lower special winning opening 2005 is open, the lower general winning opening 2005 is accepted with a high probability.

  When a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2305, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board, and when the selected normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the second starting door member 2323. Moves forward for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds) to open the second starting port 2004. Therefore, when the game ball reaches the front of the second start port 2004 at the timing when the second start port door member 2323 moves forward and is in the open state, the flow direction is changed backward by the second start port door member 2323. And is received by the second starting port 2004. When the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board and the payout control board.

  In the present embodiment, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003 (for example, 0. 0). 01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. In the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2323 moves forward and is opened after a lapse of the normal fluctuation time.

  In addition, if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the number of ordinary lottery results to be held is limited to four, and for more than that, even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  When a game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", "medium") advantageous to the player on the main control board. A special lottery result for generating “hit”, “small hit”, “per probability change”, “time reduction”, etc.). Then, the lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, special lottery results that are determined by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “15R big hit”, “ Per probability change (probability change) "," per time reduction (time reduction) "," per probability change per hour "," per probability variation per day ", and the like.

  When the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. After the elapse of the special fluctuating time, either the lower winning opening door member 2352 of the attacker unit 2300 or the upper winning opening door member 2550 of the center role 2500 is opened and closed according to the special lottery result. To open and close, and allow the lower game winning opening 2005 or the upper game winning opening 2006 to accept the game ball. When a game ball is received in the lower special winning opening 2005 or the upper special winning opening 2006 while the lower special winning opening 2005 or the upper special winning opening 2006 is in an open state, a predetermined number of payouts are performed from the payout device 830 by the main control board and the payout board. (For example, 10 or 13) game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the lower winning a prize opening door member 2352 or the upper winning prize opening door member 2550 is opening and closing in a predetermined pattern, by allowing the lower winning a prize opening 2005 or the upper winning prize opening 2006 to receive a game ball, it is possible to perform many operations. A game ball can be paid out and a player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the lower winning opening door member 2352 or the upper winning opening door member 2550 is opened for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern of closing the state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the lower winning opening door member 2352 or the upper winning opening door member 2550 is opened, or When one of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls into the special winning opening 2005 or the special winning opening 2006 is satisfied, the lower winning opening door member 2352 or the upper winning opening door member 2550 is satisfied. Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, two rounds for “2R big hit” and 15 rounds for “15R big hit” are repeated, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In addition, in the "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as a "big hit" is drawn ("probable change") or the display time of the effect image indicating the special lottery result is changed. ("Time savings").

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the special lottery result by the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004. When a game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. You. The number of reserved special lottery results to be retained is limited to a maximum of four for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  This special lottery result is indicated by the function display unit 1400 and the central liquid crystal display device 1500. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested under the direct control of the main control board. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that the plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined period of time, and thereafter, the special lottery result is indicated by a combination of the LEDs that are turned on.

  On the other hand, in the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image by being indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board based on the control signal from the main control board. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result in the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is a pattern in which three symbol rows composed of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each symbol row is fluctuated. The columns are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective symbol columns are stopped and displayed such that the symbols of the three symbol columns that are stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the special lottery result is generated.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (variation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result in the central liquid crystal display device 1500 (the image of the symbol row fluctuates and the final image is changed) (The time until is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the upper movable effect unit 2560, the lower movable effect, according to the special lottery result selected by lottery. The unit 2570, the back upper movable production unit 3100, the back lower front movable production unit 3200, the back right movable production unit 3300, the back left movable production unit 3400, the back lower rear movable production unit 3500, the back four corner movable production unit 3600, etc. The movable effect is appropriately used to perform the movable effect, and thus the player can be entertained by the movable effect, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it becomes possible to accept a game ball to the upper winning prize opening 2006, the back right rotating decorative body 3310 of the back right movable effecting unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 is rotated. When the third decorative surface 3310c is directed forward (front), the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear guideway 2553 through which the game balls received at the upper winning prize opening 2006 circulates and the rear right ball entrance 3320 coincide with each other. (See FIG. 156). In this state, when a game ball is received in the upper winning prize opening 2006, the ball enters the rear right ball entrance 3320 from the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear taxiway 2553, and is a ball guiding member arranged in the rear right rendering space 3321. Due to 3322, it flows down while rotating multiple times (here, eight times) around an axis extending vertically in the back right presentation space 3321 (see FIG. 156 (a)).

  As a result, the game balls received in the upper winning opening 2006 can be spirally flown down in the back right production space 3321, so that the player can surely recognize the gaming balls received in the upper winning opening 2006. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for paying out game balls by accepting the game balls into the upper winning prize opening 2006, and to entertain the player with the spirally flowing game balls. Can be suppressed.

  When the upper winning award winning opening 2006 is in the open state, if the back right rotating decorative body 3310 faces the front except for the third decorative surface 3310c, the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear guideway 2553 is connected to the first decorative surface 3310a. And the second decoration surface 3310b are closed by the outer peripheral surface of the second decoration surface 3310b, so that the game balls received at the upper winning award opening 2006 enter the escape passage 2555 branched off near the rear end of the rear taxiway 2553, and escape. It is discharged downward through the passage 2555. Thereby, when the upper winning a prize opening 2006 can be accepted, an effect using the back right effect space 3321 of the back right movable effect unit 3300 or an effect not using the back right effect space 3321 is performed. And a variety of variations can be presented to the player for entertaining. Further, even if the back right rotating decorative body 3310 cannot turn the third decorative surface 3310c forward for some reason, the game ball received in the upper winning award opening 2006 stays in the rear taxiway 2553. And the game can be continued without any problem.

  By the way, as a game content in the present pachinko machine 1, when "special hit" is drawn as a special lottery result drawn by accepting a game ball to the first starting port 2002, the following game state may be set. More specifically, in the case of the “special hit”, the probability that the “normal hit” of the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball through the gate unit 2003 is changed from a normal state to a high probability, and The normal fluctuation time is made shorter than usual (0.01 to 0.2 seconds). Further, the time during which the second starting port 2004 is in the open state is lengthened (3 to 6 seconds), and the number of game balls to be paid out by receiving the game balls into the second starting port 2004 is set to one. Further, the special fluctuation time is also shorter than usual (0.1 to 2 seconds), and this state is maintained until the reception of the game balls to the second starting port satisfies a predetermined number (for example, 100 to 2000). .

  As a result, when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the “normal hit” is immediately drawn with a very high probability, and the second starting port 2004 can be received so that the game ball that has drawn the “normal hit” can be received. , The game ball is received in the second starting port 2004. Since the second starting port 2004 is in the open state for a time several times longer than the continuous driving interval of the game balls (0.6 seconds), when the game balls are continuously passed through the gate portion 2003, the previous operation is performed. If the game ball is "normal hit", even if the later game ball is "normal loss", it will be accepted in the second starting port 2004, and many game balls will be accepted in the second starting port 2004 in a short time. And entertain the player. On the other hand, since the number of game balls to be paid out by receiving the second starting port 2004 is one, the payout does not exceed the consumption of the game balls, so that the burden on the game hall increases. There is no.

  Further, each time a game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, a lottery of a special lottery result is performed each time. In this gaming state, since the special fluctuation time of the special lottery result is also shorter, the special lottery result drawn one by one or every two or more in the game balls continuously received in the second starting port 2004 is held. Will be done. Therefore, as compared with the normal gaming state, the number of times of the special lottery result per time is increased, so that the timing of the “big hit” in the second starting port 2004 is earlier, and the “big hit” per unit time is increased. Is more likely to be drawn.

  Thereby, since the game ball is continuously received in the second starting port 2004 and the lottery of the special lottery result is continuously performed only by continuously performing the right-handed hit, at least the “big hit” is determined by the lottery or the predetermined condition. Until is satisfied, the game can proceed at a good speed with a good tempo, and the player's tension can be increased to enjoy the game with a sense of speed.

[7. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2300 in the front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is a variable winning opening of the present invention, the upper right entrance 2540 of the center role 2500 in the present embodiment is an entrance of the present invention, The upper gaming space 2541 corresponds to the distribution space of the present invention, the guide portion 2541a of the present embodiment corresponds to the turning portion of the present invention, and the upper right entrance 2540 and the guide portion 2541a of the present embodiment correspond to the smoother of the present invention, respectively. .

[8. Characteristic operation and effect of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the gaming state of “special contact”, the game ball hit by right-handing into the gaming area 5a passes through the upper gaming space 2541 of the center role item 2500. When the game is returned to the game area 5a and passes through the gate unit 2003, a lottery of a normal lottery result is performed. When the ordinary lottery that has been drawn is “normal hit”, the second starting port 2004 downstream of the gate unit 2003 can be received, and the game ball that has drawn “normal hit” is received in the second starting port 2004. . When a game ball is accepted in the second starting port 2004, a special lottery result lottery is performed. If the special lottery result obtained is not a "big hit", the game ball driving operation for the next lottery is performed. If the special lottery result of the lottery is "big hit", the lower winning prize entrance 2005 and the upper prize winning opening 2006 are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern as a privilege, and an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player occurs. Games ("big hit games") can be played. Since the second starting port 2004 is capable of receiving only the game balls circulating in the upper game space 2541, the driving operation such that the game balls enter the upper game space 2541 (right Striking) can be actively performed. The game ball hit into the upper game space 2541 enters the upper right entrance 2540 of the smoother that extends vertically so as to become narrower toward the downstream, and passes through the right angle direction with respect to the traveling direction of the game ball. Blur (amplitude) can be reduced, and the movement of the game ball can be stabilized and can enter the upper game space 2541. Since the game ball that has entered the upper game space 2541 in a stable state is directed straight to the exit port 2541b rightward in front view by the guide portion 2541a immediately below the upper right entrance 2540, the upper game is performed. In the space 2541, the game balls do not flow through various routes but flow through one route. Accordingly, in the upper game space 2541, the movement of the game balls is smoothed by the smoother (the upper right entrance 2540 and the guide portion 2541a), so that the motion of each game ball is stabilized, and the game balls enter the upper game space 2541. The time variation from exiting the game to the exit is reduced, and the time from hitting the game ball to reaching the second starting port 2004, the lower winning a prize port 2005, etc. through the upper game space 2541 becomes substantially constant. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform a driving operation of hitting a game ball so as to enter the upper gaming space 2541 at a timing at which the second starting port 2004 or the like downstream of the upper gaming space 2541 can be received. Even a player who is unfamiliar with the hitting operation can enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since an upper game space 2541 is provided upstream of the second starting port 2004 and the lower winning opening 2005 and the like, in which the game balls can move up and down and left and right, a game in which the upper game space 2541 is viewed. When the game ball enters the upper game space 2541 in order to allow the player to receive the game ball into the second starting port 2004 or the like, the game ball circulates through the upper game space 2541 through various routes, and The pachinko machine 1 can be assumed to be sent to the start port 2004 side, and can be recognized as the pachinko machine 1 whose timing to the second start port 2004 or the like is difficult. Therefore, it is possible to strongly attract the interest in the pachinko machine 1 to a familiar player who is confident in the operation of hitting a game ball and to motivate the player to perform the hitting operation. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected, a game with the present pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, a decrease in interest can be suppressed, and an operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased. It is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall in which 1 is installed.

  Furthermore, it is difficult to predict the flow (route) of the game ball in the upper game space 2541 by simply looking at the upper right entrance 2540 and the guide portion 2541a as a smoother, and the second starting port 2004 downstream of the upper game space 2541 is difficult. It is not possible to determine whether or not it is easy to accept the game ball, and it is necessary to drive the game ball into the game area 5a (in the upper game space 2541) in order to confirm the movement of the game ball in the upper game space 2541. Because of this, it is possible to make it easier for the player to hit the game ball into the game area 5a for the time being, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 can easily play the game. can do.

  In addition, the game ball that has fallen to the guide portion 2541a through the upper right entrance 2540a is directed straight from the guide portion 2541a to the exit port 2541b. Between the guide portion 2541a and the exit port 2541b, the game balls will be circulated in the shortest time. The timing of hitting the game ball aiming at the second starting port 2004 or the lower winning prize opening 2005 which can be accepted according to the game state can be easily set, and the hitting operation of the game ball can be enjoyed. .

  In addition, since the time required for the game ball to pass through the upper game space 2541 can be shortened as much as possible, a player such as a “big hit game” can increase the time in a relatively short time, such as when an advantageous game state occurs. When it is necessary to drive the game ball into the lower large winning opening 2005 downstream of the upper presentation space 2541, the game ball can be quickly returned into the game area 5a downstream of the upper game space 2541, and many By hitting the game ball, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Furthermore, if the normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball through the gate unit 2003 is "normal hit", the second starting port 2004 downstream of the gate unit 2003 can be received, so that the game ball is placed at the gate. By passing through the section 2003, it is possible to make the player throb and throb depending on whether or not the “normal hit” is drawn, and to increase the expectation of the player, and to set the gate section 2003 as a game ball. The game ball can be hit into the upper game space 2541 so that the game ball passes, and the hitting operation of the game ball can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and the normal lottery result of “normal hit” is drawn, the game ball that has drawn the “normal hit” is accepted in the second starting port 2004, With the “normal hit” at the gate unit 2003 by one game ball and the acceptance at the second starting port 2004, the player can be made to feel as if he / she has obtained, and the entertaining of the player can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. be able to. In addition, as soon as the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the "normal hit" is drawn, the second starting port 2004 can be immediately accepted and the game ball can be accepted, so that the game proceeds at a good tempo. It is possible to increase the tension of the player and continue the operation of hitting the game ball.

  In addition, when a game ball that has passed through the upper game space 2541 is received in the second starting port 2004, a lottery of a special lottery result is performed. Can be excited and excited, and a sense of expectation for the game can be increased, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is driven into the game area 5a by the player and the game state changes, the rear-facing movable rendering unit of the back unit 3000 according to the changed game state. In 3500, the rear lower back drive motor 3553 of the drive mechanism 3550A attached to the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552 of the rear lower back decorative body unit 3550 is driven to rotate the connection ring 3560. When the connecting ring 3560 rotates clockwise in a front view, both ends of the connecting ring 3560 and the plurality of decorative body sliders 3566 radially mounted on the circumference by the guide slit 3561d of the rotating decorative body base 3561 are respectively provided. The plurality of rotatably mounted connecting arms 3567 attempt to move in the same direction as the rotational direction of connecting ring 3560 via respective proximal ends mounted on connecting ring 3560, so that each connecting arm 3567 is The rotating decorative body base 3561 is to be rotated in the same clockwise direction as the connecting ring 3560 through the respective decorative body sliders 3566 on the distal end side. Since a rotating damping member 3565 exerts a damping force against rotation on the rotating decorative body base 3561, the rotating decorative body base 3561 attempts to maintain a stopped state without rotating. Since each decorative body slider 3566 to which the distal end side of each connecting arm 3567 is mounted is slidably mounted on the guide slit 3561d of the rotating decorative body base 3561, a force for moving each connecting arm 3567 is provided. As a result, each decoration slider 3561 slides outward along the guide slit 3561d in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the rotary decoration base 3561, and each connecting arm 3567 rotates. The plurality of rear underside rotating decorative bodies 3568 attached are movable (moved) in a direction away from the center of rotation. Thereafter, when the rotation of each rotating connection arm 3567 is restricted by the rotation restricting member 3569, the slide of each decoration body slider 3566 stops, and the connection arm 3567 is moved by the rotation of the connection ring 3560. The rotating decoration body base 3561 rotates in the same clockwise direction as the connecting ring 3560 in the front view against the damping force (viscous resistance) of the rotating damper member 3565 acting on the rotating decoration body base 3561. It will be. In other words, when the rear bottom rotation drive motor 3553 rotates in accordance with the game state, the plurality of rear bottom rotation decorations 3568 on the circumference that have been reduced in diameter and integrated are radially arranged from the initial reduced diameter position. It rotates after the diameter is increased. On the other hand, when the rear lower back rotation drive motor 3553 is rotated in the opposite direction to rotate the connection ring 3560 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the respective acting forces act in opposite directions. After the backing, the rotating decorative body 3568 returns to the initial reduced position, and can be returned to the initial state. In this way, each connecting arm 3567 is rotated by the rotational damping force acting on the rotating decorative body base 3561 to move the plurality of radially arranged rear rotating decorative bodies 3568 so as to increase or decrease the diameter. Because of this, a plurality of lower back post-rotation decorative bodies 3568 can be moved irrespective of the rotational speed of the lower back rear drive motor 3553 (rotating decorative body base 3561), and a plurality of lower back post-rotation decorative bodies 3568. Can be performed at various speeds.

  Therefore, various movable effects can be presented to the player by using the plurality of back-and-forth back decorations 3568 that rotate and move (the outer diameter changes), so that the player can be bored easily. The decoration and movement of the plurality of back-and-under rotation decorations 3568 can be sufficiently enjoyed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game. In addition, when the plurality of back-and-under rotation decorations 3568 rotate, the diameter of the plurality of back-and-under rotation decorations 3568 is radially increased or reduced, so that the plurality of back-and-under rotation decorations 3568 are made more conspicuous, and the interest of the player is changed. It can be attracted to the decorative body 3568, and the movable effect of the rotating back and forth decorative body 3568 can be surely shown and enjoyed by the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player. It is possible to raise the expectation of the game by making the user think that there is something good, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In addition, as described above, a plurality of under-the-bottom rear rotation decorative bodies 3568 can be radially moved around the rotation axis and rotated only by the rotational drive of the under-the-bottom rear rotation drive motor 3553. It is not necessary to provide a lock mechanism for locking the rotation as described above, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the size of the mechanism for rotating the plurality of back-and-forth back decorations 3568, and the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) Space can be more effectively utilized.

  Furthermore, a plurality of underside rear rotation decorative bodies 3568 can be radially moved and rotated only by the rotational drive of the underside rear rotation drive motor 3553, and a lock solenoid is provided in addition to the drive motor as in the prior art. Therefore, it is not necessary to appropriately control the drive motor and the lock solenoid, so that it is possible to simplify the control relating to the movable effect of the plurality of back-and-forth back decorations 3568, and reduce the control load on the peripheral control board. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a trouble that interrupts the game due to an increase in control load, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest of the player.

  In addition, when the plurality of lower back rear decorations 3568 are reduced in diameter by driving the lower back rotation drive motor 3553, the adjacent lower back rotation decorations 3568 come into contact with each other. 3568 makes it possible to form one large decorative body. Even if a plurality of back-and-forth back rotating decorative bodies 3568 are moved to the center side, a decrease in decorativeness (design) can be suppressed, and the gaming area 5a. The inside appearance can be improved to enhance the appeal to the player, and the plurality of back-and-forth back decorations 3568 can be integrated or separated, so that the plurality of back-and-back rotation decorations 3568 can be integrated. , The impact of the movable effect can be increased, the player can be entertained, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the damping force is applied to the rotation of the rotary decorative body by the rotary damper member 3565, compared with the case where the damping force is applied by the sliding resistance and the rotating resistance of the plurality of gears, Therefore, the configuration for applying the damping force can be reduced, and the differential mechanism 3550B can be downsized. Therefore, it is possible to increase the size of the rotary decoration body 3568 relatively behind the back and to secure a space for providing other decoration bodies and accessories, and to make the pachinko machine 1 more entertaining to the player. Can be. In addition, compared with the case where the damping force is applied by sliding resistance or rotation resistance, since there is no mechanical wear, the damping force can be applied stably for a long time, and the durability is high. The game can be made harder to break, and the interruption of the game due to the break can be reduced, so that the interest of the player can be prevented from lowering.

  Furthermore, since the lower back rear fixed decorative body 3573 is provided at the center of rotation of the rotating decorative body base 3561 and the like, the plurality of lower back rear rotating decorative bodies 3568 are moved away from the center of rotation by the driving of the lower back rear rotation drive motor 3553. When moved to, the lower back fixed decorative body 3573 arranged at the center of rotation can be visually recognized from the player side, the appearance in the game area 5a can be maintained in a good state, and the lower back rear decorative decoration can be maintained. The whole body 3568 can be made to look as if it has become large, and the player can be surprised to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Also, depending on the game state, the lower back rear rotating decorative body 3568 is moved downward from the center of the game area 5a by the elevating unit 3510 of the lower back movable effect unit 3500 via the decorative body base 3551 or the like ( Since it is possible to move between the lower end position) and the second position (rising end position) approaching the center, by moving and rotating the lower back and back rotating decorative body 3568 at the center in the game area 5a, The back decoration 3568 can be made to stand out in the game area 5a to attract the interest of the player, and the movable decoration by rotating the back decoration 3568 can be enjoyed. The rear rotating decorative body 3568 moves to the center of the game area 5a and rotates, thereby strongly suggesting the arrival of a chance to the player, and the player's expectation of the game. It can be greatly enhanced allowed to suppress a drop in interest.

  In addition, the back and forth rotating decorative body 3568 is moved by the elevating unit 3510 via the decorative body base 3551 and the like to the surface of the gaming panel 1100 between the first position (downward end position) and the second position (upward end position). Since it can be moved along, it is possible to move the back-and-forth back decoration 3568 to various positions and to rotate the back-and-back rotation decoration 3568 moved to various positions, and Movable effects using the decorative body 3568 can be made more versatile, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball hit into the game area 5a is provided with the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2002 of the front unit 2000 attached to the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) from the front. When accepted in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a predetermined privilege and a special lottery result is drawn, and in accordance with the special lottery result (“big hit”, “middle hit”, “ The upper winning prize opening 2006 arranged in the upper part of the game area 5a is opened (according to "small hit", etc.), so that game balls can be accepted. On the other hand, in the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100, the column-shaped back right rotating decoration 3310 extending vertically up and down of the back right movable rendering unit 3300 extends vertically according to the special lottery result. When it rotates around an axis and stops rotating at the communication position (the position where the third decorative surface 3310c faces the front) where the back right rendering space 3321 through which the game ball can flow can be visually recognized from the player side, The rear right ball entrance 3320 opened on the outer peripheral surface is opened forward, and the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear guideway 2553 of the center role 2500 in the front unit 2000 coincides with the rear right ball entrance 3320. It will be in the state of having done. In this state, when a game ball is received in the open upper winning opening 2006, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, and the received game ball is rotated through the rear taxiway 2553 to the back right rotating decorative body 3310. The game ball enters the back right production space 3321, and the game ball flows downward while rotating spirally with the kurukuru by the ball guiding member 3322 in the back right production space 3321, and the game ball flows down in the back right production space 3321. Can be visually recognized (shown) by the player. Therefore, the game balls received in the upper winning opening 2006, which could not be seen with the conventional pachinko machine, can be viewed, and the game balls flow down while rotating spirally with the circle in the back right production space 3321. Can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the escape passage 2555 that branches off immediately before the rear discharge port 2554 in the rear guideway 2553 of the center role 2500 is provided, when the back right rotating decorative body 3310 does not face the third decorative surface 3310c to the front, In the case where the game ball is received in front of the back right ball entrance 3320 in the back right rotating decoration body 3310 with the third decoration surface 3310c facing the front, when the game ball is received in the upper winning opening 2006, the backward guidance is performed. Game balls can be discharged downward through the escape passage 2555 from the middle of the passage 2553. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls from accumulating in the rear taxiway 2553, so that the game balls cannot be accepted at the upper winning award 2006 and the game must be interrupted. It is possible to prevent irritation of the player due to the interruption, and to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  Further, according to a special lottery result drawn by accepting a game ball into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the back right turning space 3321 is rotated to the communication position where the player can visually recognize the back right producing space 3321. Since the decorative body 3310 is rotated, if the back right rotating decorative body 3310 rotates and the back right effect space 3321 becomes visible before the upper prize winning opening 2006 is opened, the upper prize winning opening 2006 is opened. Can be foreseen by the player, the expectation of the player for the game can be increased, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. In addition, even when the upper winning a prize opening 2006 is not opened, the back right rotating decorative body 3310 may be rotated to the communication position, which is one of the movable effects (reach effect), which can entertain the player, and can be variously performed. The effect makes it difficult for the player to get tired, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the rear discharge port 2554 of the center role item 2500 is opened rearward, and the rear right ball entrance 3320 of the rear right movable rendering unit 3300 that can match the rear discharge port 2554 is opened frontward. In addition, since the game ball is guided downward while being spirally rotated by the ball guiding member 3322, the speed of the game ball is changed from the rear guide path 2553 through the back right ball entrance 3320 into the back right effect space 3321. After entering without lowering, it can be guided smoothly downward by the ball guiding member 3322, and it is possible to suppress the game ball from being stagnated in the vicinity of the back right ball entrance 3320. Even if many game balls are guided in a short period of time, the game balls can be smoothly transferred to the back right rendering space 3321 without delay. It can, it is possible to entertain the player

  In addition, since the back right rotation decorative body 3310 is formed in a columnar shape extending vertically, the back right rotation decoration body 3310 can be rotated to any position and the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear guide path 2553 and the back right rotation. The distance between the outer peripheral surface of the decorative body 3310 does not change, and the rear discharge port 2554 is securely closed by the outer peripheral surface of the back right rotational decorative body 3310 when the back right rotational decorative body 3310 is not in the communicating position. Can be.

  In addition, since the upper winning a prize opening 2006 is arranged in the upper part in the game area 5a, it is easy for a player to aim at the upper winning prize opening 2006 during the operation of hitting a game ball. The pachinko machine 1 can make it easy to accept game balls, and can be a pachinko machine 1 in which even a beginner or a player unfamiliar with the operation of driving the game balls can sufficiently enjoy the game.

  Furthermore, since the back right rotating decorative body 3310 is configured to rotate around an axis extending vertically, the back right rotating decorative body 3310 is rotatably rotated to play a movable effect of the back right rotating decorative body 3310. And the player can recognize the existence of the back right production space 3321 since the back right production space 3321 is instantaneously visible from the player side, and the game ball can be displayed on the back right. It is possible to increase a sense of expectation for distribution in the effect space 3321 and to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, the back right rotating decorative body 3310 is configured to rotate around an axis extending vertically, and the first decorative surface 3310a other than the third decorative surface 3310c in which the back right effect space 3321 is visible on the outer peripheral surface. Since the second decoration surface 3310b is decorated and the outer peripheral surface seen from the player side differs depending on the rotation stop position of the back right rotation decoration body 3310, even if the back right rotation decoration body 3310 is always visible from the player side. It is possible to reduce the deterioration of the design in the game area 5a, improve the appearance in the game area 5a, and increase the appeal of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the game ball is caused to flow downward while rotating spirally with the circle by the ball guiding member 3322 in the back right production space 3321, and the flowing speed of the game ball is made slower than the height of the back right production space 3321. Therefore, the movement of the game ball can be enjoyed for a relatively long time in the back right presentation space 3321, and it is possible to make the player hard to get tired and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, when the upper winning a prize opening 2006 becomes ready to accept, a large number of game balls can be received in a relatively short time. Thus, the movement of the game ball with a sense of dynamism can be shown to the player, and the player can be greatly enjoyed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the rear taxiway 2553, the escape passage 2555, and the like are provided in the front unit 2000 attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. Since the back right rotating decorative body 3310 having the effect space 3321 is provided in the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, the space for disposing the back right rotating decorative body 3310 in the game board 5 is provided. Can be easily secured, the back right rotating decorative body 3310 can be made large, and the back right rotating decorative body 3310 can be made to stand out to strongly attract the interest of the player to the back right producing space 3321.

  Further, since the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear taxiway 2553 is arranged at a position substantially coincident with the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), the rear right ball entrance 3320 of the rear right rotating decorative body 3310 is opened. Since the outer peripheral surface is located as close as possible to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, a wider space in the front-rear direction for the back right rotating decorative body 3310 can be secured. Therefore, the diameter of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 can be increased (the dimension in the front-rear direction of the back right presentation space 3321 is made as large as possible), and the game ball is spirally turned in the back right presentation space 3321. It is possible to surely secure a space to be played, and to make a player entertain the movement of the game ball, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player changes the game state by hitting a game ball into the game area 5a, the back side disposed behind the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110). The upper back decorative body 3152 of the upper back movable rendering unit 3100 in the unit 3000 has a first transmission member 3107, a first movable base 3116, and a first cover that are operated by a back upper drive motor 3103 driven according to a changed game state. The second transmission member 3108 which is moved by the appearance mechanism such as the transmission member 3117 and the bearing member 3118 between the evacuation position where the player can visually recognize it and the first appearance position where the player can visually recognize the same, and is also operated by the upper back drive motor 3103. , The second movable base 3119, the second transmitted member 3122, the rotating link member 3123, the moving mechanism of the second movable base driving member 3124, etc. Therefore, while moving between the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the rotation of the rack gear 3115a, the second movable base 3119, the decoration body rotating gear 3120, and the like, which are operated by the movement of the back decoration 3152 by the movement mechanism. By the mechanism, the upper back decoration 3152 having the decoration in which the head (face) of the directional character is formed three-dimensionally rotates between the normal direction and the abnormal direction. Therefore, since various movable effects can be shown to the player, it is possible to make the player hard to get tired of and to enjoy the game, and to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  The specific movable effect is such that the back upper decorative body 3152 is in an abnormal direction at the evacuation position, and the appearance mechanism of the first transmitted member 3117 and the like operated by the back upper drive motor 3103 driven according to the game state, When the back upper decorative body 3152 moves from the evacuation position to the first appearance position, the character appears upside down with the character's face turned upside down, so that as if the character peeped from above (behind the ceiling) to the player. When the back upper decorative body 3152 is returned to the evacuation position in this state, it is possible to perform a movable effect as if the character were looking from above (behind the ceiling). Also, when the back upper decorative body 3152 is moved from the state of the first appearance position to the second appearance position by the moving mechanism such as the second transmitted member 3122, the rotation of the decorative body rotating gear 3120 or the like operated by the movement by the moving mechanism. By the mechanism, the upper back decoration 3152 rotates while moving from the first appearance position to the second appearance position, and assumes a normal orientation at the second appearance position. As a result, the character that has been turned upside down rotates and moves to the normal direction, so that the player is made to look as if the character peeping from above (behind the ceiling) is flipping and descending. Can greatly surprise the player and make a strong impact. Also, when the back upper decorative body 3152 returns to the retreat position, the back upper decorative body 3152 is rotated and returned, so that the character is as if hiding upward (behind the ceiling) to the player as if it were flipping. This allows the player to entertain even when the upper back decoration 3152 returns to the retracted position. In this way, a variety of movable effects that could not be achieved with the conventional pachinko machines can be presented to the player, which can make the player less tired and entertained, and can be enjoyed for games. The decrease can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the upper back decoration 3152 is a directional three-dimensional character, when the upper back decoration 3152 is moved from the invisible retreat position to the first appearance position where it is visible, the player instantly It is possible to recognize whether the back decoration 3152 is in a normal orientation or an unusual orientation, and it is possible to greatly enjoy a movable effect in which the orientation of the back decoration 3152 changes, thereby making the player tired. This makes it difficult to reduce the interest in the game. In addition, when the back upper decorative body 3152 appears, the character appears (appears), so that the player can be strongly convinced that something is good, and a sense of expectation for the game is provided. Can be increased.

  In addition, since the upper back decoration 3152 is moved along the surface of the game panel 1100 by the appearance mechanism of the first transmitted member 3117 or the like, compared with the case where the back upper decoration 3152 is moved in the front-rear direction. In this way, the moving distance of the upper decorative body can be lengthened to perform a moving effect with an impact, or the decorative upper body 3152 can be enlarged to increase the visual impact, thereby making the player more enjoyable. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the upper back decoration 3152 is rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by a rotation mechanism such as the decoration body rotation gear 3120. Since the entire image of the decorative body 3152 can be recognized by the player, when the directional upper decorative body 3152 is rotated by the rotating mechanism, the orientation of the upper decorative body 3152 changes with respect to the player. (Rotated) can be clearly recognized. Therefore, it is possible to exhibit the unexpectedness and the interestingness in which the direction of the directional upper decorative body 3152 is changed, so that the desired effect can be sufficiently obtained, and the entertainment of the player is reduced, thereby reducing the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the upper back decoration 3152 is rotated around the axis extending in the front-rear direction, the space occupied by the upper back decoration 3152 in the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be easily secured, and The size of the upper decorative body 3152 can be relatively increased. Therefore, since the upper back decoration 3152 can be made to stand out, the player can be greatly surprised by the appearance of the large upper back decoration 3152, and at the same time, the expectation for the game can be increased, and the player's expectation for the game can be increased. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the upper decorative body 3152 in the retracted position is moved to the lower first appearance position by the appearance mechanism such as the first transmitted member 3117, the upper decorative body 3152 comes down from above and appears. Therefore, the appearance of the back decoration 3152 makes it possible for the player to feel as if the revelation is shown from above, and makes it possible for the player to think that something is good. In addition, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, since the first appearance position is arranged below the evacuation position, when the upper back decoration 3152 is caused to appear in an abnormal direction, the upper back decoration 3152 can be seen from the upper side of the decoration of the back upper decoration 3152 in order. It does not give a great sense of discomfort to the person. Therefore, the player can be entertained even if the back upper decorative body 3152 appears in an abnormal direction, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, since the back decoration 3152 can be further moved from the first appearance position to the second appearance position by the moving mechanism such as the second transmitted member 3122 separately from the appearance mechanism such as the first transmitted member 3117, The back decoration 3152 can be moved in two stages from the retracted position, and the movement of the back decoration 3152 moving in multiple stages can be enjoyed by the player, and a more versatile movable effect can be provided to the player. It can be presented, making it difficult for the player to get tired of the game and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the rotation mechanism such as the decorative body rotating gear 3120, the appearance mechanism such as the first transmitted member 3117, and the moving mechanism such as the second transmitted member 3122 are operated by one back upper drive motor 3103. Therefore, as compared with the case where the rotating mechanism, the appearance mechanism, and the moving mechanism are separately operated by three drive motors, the number of the drive motors (the upper-side drive motor 3103) is reduced to one. An extra space can be secured, and the upper back decoration 3152 can be made larger, and the moving distance of the upper back decoration 3152 can be increased. Accordingly, since the upper decorative body 3152 itself and the movement of the upper decorative body can be made to stand out, the player can be greatly surprised by the appearance of the upper decorative body 3152, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player. In addition, since the rotating mechanism, the appearance mechanism, and the moving mechanism can be operated by one back upper drive motor 3103 to cause the back upper decorative body 3152 to perform a movable effect, a variety of movable effects can be performed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the control load on the peripheral control board relating to the effects and the like, to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions due to the increase in the control load, and to enjoy the pachinko machine 1 without interrupting the game. it can.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game state is changed by hitting a game ball into the game area 5a, the back of the back movable movable unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is changed according to the changed game state. Either the drive motor 3103 or the back four corner drive motors 3615 and 3655 of the back four corner movable rendering unit 3600 is driven to drive the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 or the transmission members 3616 and 3656. The first transmission portions 3617, 3657 and the second transmission portions 3618, 3658 rotate together. Then, first, when the first transmission member 3107 or the first transmission portions 3617 and 3657 reach the first specific rotation range, the rotation of the first transmission member 3107 or the first transmission portions 3617 and 3657 becomes The power is transmitted to the first transmitted member 3117 or the first transmitted members 3620 and 3660, and the back upper decorative body 3512 or the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 move. After that, when the first transmission member 3107 or the first transmission portions 3617 and 3657 further rotate, and the first transmission member 3107 or the first transmission portions 3617 and 3657 come out of the first specific rotation range, The transmission of rotation to the first transmitted member 3117 or the first transmitted member 3620, 3660 by the first transmitting member 3107 or the first transmitting portions 3617, 3657 is stopped, and the back upper decorative body 3512, or Then, the movement of the four back corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 stops. Up to now, the second transmission member 3108 or the second transmission portions 3618 and 3658 have also been rotated, but the second transmission member 3108 or the second transmission portions 3618 and 3658 are within the second specific rotation range. , The rotation of the second transmission member 3108 or the rotation of the second transmission portions 3618 and 3658 is not transmitted to the second transmitted member 3122 or the second transmitted members 3629 and 3669. The second decorative member 3112 or the second decorative members 3629 and 3669 do not move the back upper decorative body 3512 or the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673. Then, the first transmission member 3107 or the first transmission portions 3617 and 3657 come out of the first specific rotation range and rotate together with the first transmission member 3107 or the first transmission portions 3617 and 3657. When the second transmission member 3108 or the second transmission portions 3618 and 3658 reach the second specific rotation range, the rotation of the second transmission member 3108 or the second transmission portions 3618 and 3658 causes the second transmitted member 3122 to rotate. Alternatively, the power is transmitted to the second transmitted members 3629 and 3669, and the upper decorative body 3152 further moves or the second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 move at the four back corners. At this time, the first transmission member 3107 or the first transmission portions 3617 and 3657 rotating together with the second transmission member 3108 or the second transmission portions 3618 and 3658 are out of the first specific rotation range. Therefore, the rotation of the first transmitting member 3107 or the first transmitting portions 3617 and 3657 is not transmitted to the first transmitted member 3117 or the first transmitted members 3620 and 3660, and the first transmitted The upper decorative body 3152 or the four back corner first decorative bodies 3624, 3664 are not moved by the member 3117 or the first transmitted members 3620, 3660. When the second transmission member 3108 or the second transmission portions 3618 and 3658 come out of the second specific rotation range, the second transmitted member 3122 by the second transmission member 3108 or the second transmission portions 3618 and 3658. Alternatively, the transmission of rotation to the second transmitted members 3269, 3669 is stopped, and the movement of the back upper decorative body 3152 or the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633, 3673 is stopped.

  As described above, when the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 or the first transmission portions 3617 and 3657 and the second transmission portions 3618 and 3658 are within the first specific rotation range and the second specific rotation range. Only the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122, or the first transmitted members 3620, 3660 and the second transmitted members 3633, 3673, are transmitted with rotation to provide a back upper decorative body 3152 or a back. Since the four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 or the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 can be moved, the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 or the first transmission parts 3617 and 3657 and the second When the transmission units 3618 and 3658 are outside the first specific rotation range and outside the second specific rotation range, the back upper decorative body 3152 or the like, or the back four corner first decorative body 3624, 664 and the back four corners of the second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 may cause the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122 or the first transmitted members 3620 and 3660 and the second transmitted members 3629 and 3669 to move. The rear upper drive body 312 or the back four corner drive motors 3615 and 3655 do not act on the rear upper drive body 312 or the rear four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 and the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633. , 3673, the load on the upper back drive motor 3103 or the back four corner drive motors 3615, 3655 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to breakage of the back upper drive motor 3103 and the back four corner drive motors 3615, 3655 during the game, and to reduce the discomfort of the player due to the interruption of the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108, or the first transmission portions 3617 and 3657 and the second transmission portions 3618 and 3658 are outside the first specific rotation range and outside the second specific rotation range, the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3618 and 3658 are out of the first specific rotation range. In order not to transmit the rotation to the transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122, or the first transmitted members 3620, 3660 and the second transmitted members 3629, 3669, the first transmitting member 3107 and the second transmitting member 3108, Or, when the first transmitting portions 3617, 3657 and the second transmitting portions 3618, 3658 are outside the first specific rotation range and outside the second specific rotation range, the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122, or The upper decorative body 3152 or the four back corner first decorative bodies 3624, via the first transmitted members 3620, 3660 and the second transmitted members 3629, 3669. 664 and the back corners second decorative body 3633,3673 never be movable. That is, the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108, or the first transmission portions 3617 and 3657 and the second transmission portions 3618 and 3658 come out of the first specific rotation range and the second specific rotation range. When the rotation of the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122 or the first transmitted members 3620 and 3660 and the second transmitted members 3629 and 3669 is stopped, the back upper decorative body 3152 or the back four corners is stopped. Since the movement of one of the decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 and the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 is stopped and the movement is locked, it is difficult for the decorative bodies to return when locked as in the related art. There is no natural movement, and the back upper decorative body 3152, the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624, 3664, and the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633, 3673 are made to naturally move. Bets can be, Urajo decorative body 3152 to the player, it is possible to back corners first decorative body 3624,3664, and entertain the back corners movement of the second decoration member 3633,3673 to suppress the lowering of interest.

  Further, the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122, or the first transmitted members 3620, 3660, and the second transmitted member 3117, which are separately rotated by the back upper drive motor 3103 or the back four corner drive motors 3615 and 3655, respectively. Since the transmission members 3629 and 3669 are provided, the back upper decorative body 3152 is provided in two stages, or two of the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 and the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673. Can be moved, so that the back upper decorative body 3152, the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624, 3664, and the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633, 3673 present a variety of movable effects to the player. And a gaming machine that makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, and the back upper decorative body 3152, the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624, 3664, and the back four corner second decorative body Can entertain movable rendition of 633,3673, a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122 or the first transmitted members 3620, 3660 and the second transmitted member 3122 are driven by one back upper drive motor 3103 or back four corner drive motors 3615, 3655. The driven members 3629 and 3669 can be rotated separately, and the back upper decorative body 3152 or the back four corner first decorative body can be rotated by only one back upper drive motor 3103 or the back four corner drive motors 3615 and 3655. Since the 3624, 3664 and the four back corner second decorative bodies 3663, 3673 can be made to move complicatedly, for example, the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122, or the first transmitted member 3620, 3660 and the second transmitted members 3629, 3669, respectively, as compared with the case where they are rotated by separate drive motors. 103 and the number of the back four corner drive motors 3615 and 3655 can be reduced, and the load related to the control of the movable effect can be reduced. The back drive motor 3103 and the back four corner drive motors 3615 and 3655 due to overload (back decoration) The malfunction of the body 3152, the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624, 3664 and the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633, 3673) can be prevented, and the desired movable effect can be reliably presented to the player.

  Further, the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108, or the first transmission portions 3617 and 3657 and the second transmission portions 3618 and 3658 are provided with the first transmission pin 3107b protruding from a position farther than the center of rotation. And the second transmission pin 3108b, or the first transmission pin 3617a and the second transmission pin 3618a, and the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122, or the first transmitted member 3620, The first transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3108b, or the first transmission pin 3617 and the second transmission pin 3618a can be slidably inserted into the 3660 and the second transmitted members 3629 and 3669, respectively. One transmitted main body portion 3117c and second transmitted main body portion 3122b, or first transmitted main body portions 3620c and 3660c and second transmitted main body portion 3122b. Groove-shaped first and second transmission slits 3117d and 3122c or first and second transmission slits 3620d and 3660d and 3629c and 3669c extending from the outer peripheral surfaces of main body portions 3629b and 3669b toward the center of rotation. Have. Accordingly, the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108, or the first transmission portions 3617, 3657 and the second transmission portions 3618, 3658 are rotated by the back upper drive motor 3103 or the back four corner drive motors 3615, 3655. By doing so, the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108, or the first transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3108b of the first transmission part 3617, 3657 and the second transmission part 3618, 3658, or the first transmission member The pins 3617a, 3657a and the second transmission pins 3618a, 3658a revolve, and the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108, or the first transmission portions 3617, 3657 and the second transmission portions 3618, 3658 rotate in the first specific rotation. From the one end within the range and the second specific rotation range within the first specific rotation range and the second specific rotation When entering the enclosure, the first transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3108b, or the first transmission pins 3617a and 3657a and the second transmission pins 3618a and 3658a are moved to the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122, Or, in the first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission slit 3122c of the first transmitted member 3620, 3660 and the second transmitted member 3629, 3669, or in the first transmission slit 3620d, 3660d and the second transmission slit 3629c, 3669c. It enters into the first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission slit 3122c or the first transmission slits 3620d and 3660d and the second transmission slits 3629c and 3669c from a portion opened on the outer peripheral surface.

  The first transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3108b, or the first transmission pins 3617a and 3657a and the second transmission pins 3618a and 3658a are in the first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission slit 3122c, or in the first transmission pin. The slits 3620d and 3660d and the second transmission slits 3629c and 3669c enter the first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission slit 3122c, or the first transmission slits 3620d and 3660d and the second transmission slits 3629c and 3669c. When the first transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3108b are inserted into the first transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3618b, the first transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3618a and 3658a revolve. Second transmission pin 3108b Alternatively, the first transmission pins 3617a and 3657a and the second transmission pins 3618a and 3658a are in the first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission slit 3122c, or in the first transmission slits 3620d and 3660d and the second transmission slits 3629c and 3669c. The first transmission member 3117 and the second transmission member 3122 or the first transmission member 3620 and 3660 and the second transmission member 3629 and 3669 slide in the direction of the rotation center and the first transmission slit. It presses in 3117d and the second transmission slit 3122c, or in the first transmission slits 3620d and 3660d and in the second transmission slits 3629c and 3669c in the direction of revolving, and thus the first transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3108b. Or the first transmission pins 3617a, 36 The rotation of the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122 or the first transmitted member 3620, 3660 and the second transmitted member 3629, 3669 due to the pressing of the first transmission member 3117 and the second transmission pin 3618a, 3658a. Become.

  Thereafter, the first transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3108b, or the first transmission pins 3617a and 3657a and the second transmission pins 3618a and 3658a further revolve, and the first transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3108b or The first transmission pins 3617a and 3657a and the second transmission pins 3618a and 3658a are the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122, or the first transmitted members 3620 and 3660 and the second transmitted members 3629 and 3669. Beyond the position closest to the rotation center of the first transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3108b, or the first transmission pins 3617a and 3657a and the second transmission pins 3618a and 3658a are in the first transmission slit 3117d and In the two transmission slits 3122c or the first transmission slit 362 d, 3660d and inside the second transmission slits 3629c, 3669c, the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122 or the first transmitted member 3620, 3660 and the second transmitted member 3629, 3669. From the first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission slit 3122c, or the first transmission slit 3620d, 3660d and the first transmission slit 3629c, 3669c. The first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission member 3117 and the second transmission member 3122, or the first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission member 3629 and the second transmission member 3629 and the second transmission member 3629 and the second transmission member 3669 open from the outer peripheral surface thereof. Outside the transmission slit 3122c or outside the first transmission slit 3620d, 3660d Beauty second transmission slits 3629C, so that the exit outside 3669C. The first transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3108b, or the first transmission pins 3617a and 3657a and the second transmission pins 3618a and 3658a are outside the first transmission slit 3117d and outside the second transmission slit 3122c, or the first transmission slit. When it goes out of 3620d and 3660d and out of the second transmission slits 3629c and 3669c, the first transmission by the first transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3108b, or the first transmission pin 3617a and 3657a and the second transmission pin 3618a and 3658a. Since there is no pressing in the slit 3117d and the second transmission slit 3122c, or in the first transmission slits 3620d and 3660d and the second transmission slits 3629c and 3669c, the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122, Or the first transmitted Rotation of wood 3620,3660 and second transmitted member 3629,3669 is stopped.

  In this case, the first transmitting member 3107 and the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitting member 3108 and the second transmitted member 3122, or the transmitting member 3616 and the first transmitted members 3620 and 3660 and the second transmitted member When viewed from the direction in which the rotation axes of the members 3629 and 3669 extend, the first orbiting first or second reciprocating members 3107 and 3108, or the first orbiting portions 3617 and 3657 and the second orbiting portions 3618 and 3658 revolve. The turning trajectory of the transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3108b or the first transmission pin 3617a and 3657a and the second transmission pin 3618a and 3658a is the first transmission member 3117 and the second transmission member 3122 or the first transmission member 3122 or the first transmission member 3122. First transmission slit 3117d in transmitted members 3620, 3660 and second transmitted members 3629, 3669 And the second transmission slit 3122c, or the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108, or the first transmission portions 3617 and 3657 that overlap with the turning locus of the first transmission slits 3620d and 3660d and the second transmission slits 3629c and 3669c. And the rotation range of the second transmission units 3618 and 3658 becomes the first specific rotation range and the second specific rotation range. Therefore, in the rotation range of the first transmission member 317 and the second transmission member 3108, or the first transmission portion 3617, 3657 and the second transmission portion 3618, 3658, the first transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3108b, or The first transmission pins 3617a, 3657a and the second transmission pins 3618a, 3658a are located in the first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission slit 3122c, or in the first transmission slits 3620d, 3660d and the second transmission slits 3629c, 3669c. The first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108, or the first transmission portions 3617 and 3657 and the second transmission portion 3618, only when they are within the inserted ranges (the first specific rotation range and the second specific rotation range). The rotation of 3658 is performed by the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122, or Can be transmitted to one transmitted member 3620,3660 and second transmitted member 3629,3669, it is possible to reliably realize the pachinko machine 1 functions and effects described above.

  Further, the first transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3108b of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108, or the first transmission portion 3617 and 3657 and the second transmission portion 3618 and 3658, or the first transmission pin 3617a, 3657a and second transmission pins 3618a, 3658a, and first transmission of first transmitted member 3117 and second transmitted member 3122, or first transmitted members 3620, 3660 and second transmitted members 3629, 3669. Since the rotation is transmitted by the slit 3117d and the second transmission slit 3122c or the first transmission slits 3620d and 3660d and the second transmission slits 3629c and 3669c, the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108, Or, the first transmission units 3617 and 3657 and the second transmission unit 36 8, 3658, the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122, or the first transmitted members 3620 and 3660 and the second transmitted members 3629 and 3669, even if the rotational position is slightly shifted. The first transmission pins 3617a, 3657a and the inside of the first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission slit 3122c, or the first transmission slits 3620d and 3660d and the second transmission slits 3629c and 3669c from the part opened to the surface. The second transmission pins 3618a, 3658a can be inserted, and the first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission slit 3122c, or the first transmission slits 3620d, 3660d, and the second transmission slit can be inserted from the opened portion. The first transmission pins 3617a and 3617 are located outside 3629c and 3669c. 7a and the second transmission pins 3618a and 3658a can be ejected, and the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108, or the first transmission portions 3617 and 3657 and the second transmission portions 3618 and 3658 can be rotated forward / reversely. Even if it does, rotation can be reliably transmitted to the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122 or the first transmitted members 3620 and 3660 and the second transmitted members 3629 and 3669.

  In addition, the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108, or the first transmission portion 3617,3657 and the second transmission portion 3618,3658 have the first transmission pin 3617a, 3657a and the second transmission pin 3618a, 3658a. A first lock protrusion 3107c and a second lock protrusion 3108c having a radius smaller than the orbital radius, or first lock protrusions 3617b and 3657b and second lock protrusions 3618b and 3658b, and a first lock protrusion. 3107c and the second lock projection 3108c, or the first transmission pins 3617a and 3657a and the second transmission pins 3618a and 3658a on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first lock projections 3617b and 3657b and the second lock projections 3618b and 3658b. First notch 3107d and second notch 31 in which the existing part is cut out in a fan shape 8d or the first notch portions 3617c and 3657c and the second notch portions 3618c and 3658c, and the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122 or the first transmitted portion. The members 3620, 3660 and the second transmitted members 3629, 3669 are provided with a disc-shaped first transmitted main body 3117c and a second transmitted main body 3122b, or a first transmitted main body 3620c, 3660c and a second transmitted main body 3660c. From the outer peripheral surface to the center of rotation on both sides of the first transmitting slit 3117d and the second transmitting slit 3122c or the first transmitting slit 3620d, 3660d and the second transmitting slit 3629c, 3669c on the outer peripheral surface of the transmitted main body portions 3629b, 3669b. The first lock projection 3107c and the second lock projection 3108c Alternatively, the first lock concave portion 3117e and the second lock concave portion 3122d capable of contacting the outer peripheral surfaces of the first lock convex portions 3617b, 3657b and the second lock convex portions 3618b, 3658b, or the first lock concave portions 3620e, 3660e, and the third Further, two lock recesses 3629d and 3669d are provided.

  Then, the first transmission pins 3617a and 3657a and the second transmission pins 3618a and 3658a are connected to the first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission slit 3122c, or the first transmission slits 3620d and 3660d and the second transmission slit 3629c. When inserted into the 3669c, the first notch 3107d and the second notch 3108d, or the first notches 3617c and 3657c and the second notches 3618c and 3658c are connected to the first lock recess 3117e and the second lock. The first transmission pin 3617a, 3657a and the second transmission pin 3618a, 3658a are opposed to the concave portion 3122d or the first lock concave portions 3620e, 3660e and the second lock concave portions 3629d, 3669d. Inside the slit 3122c, When it is not inserted in the first transmission slits 3620d, 3660d and the second transmission slits 3629c, 3669c, the first lock projection 3107c and the second lock projection 3108c, or the first lock projections 3617b, 3657b and The second lock projections 3618b and 3658b are in contact with the first lock recess 3117e and the second lock recess 3122d, or the first lock recesses 3620e and 3660e and the second lock recesses 3629d and 3669d.

  Thereby, the first transmission pins 3617a and 3657a and the second transmission pins 3618a and 3658a are in the first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission slit 3122c, or in the first transmission slits 3620d and 3660d and the second transmission slit 3629c. In a state before being inserted into the 3669c, the first transmitting member 3107 and the two first locking recesses 3117e and the second locking recess 3122d or the first locking recesses 3620e and 3660e and the second locking recesses 3629d and 3669d. The rotation center of the second transmission member 3108 or the first transmission portions 3617 and 3657 and the second transmission portions 3618 and 3658 and the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122 or the first transmitted member 3620, Rotation of 3660 and second transmitted members 3629, 3669 The first lock projection 3107c is provided in the first lock recess 3117e and the second lock recess 3122d, or in the first lock recesses 3620e and 3660e and the second lock recesses 3629d and 3669d on the side near the axis connecting the core. And the second lock projection 3108c or the first lock projections 3617b and 3657b and the second lock projections 3618b and 3658b are inserted and abutted. Therefore, even if the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122 or the first transmitted members 3620 and 3660 and the second transmitted members 3629 and 3669 are about to rotate, the first lock projection 3107c and the second lock The protrusion 3108c or the first lock protrusions 3617b, 3657b and the second lock protrusions 3618b, 3658b are prevented from rotating (locked) by contact, and cannot rotate.

  On the other hand, the first lock projection 3107c and the second lock inserted into the first lock recess 3117e and the second lock recess 3122d, or the first lock recesses 3620e and 3660e and the second lock recesses 3629d and 3669d, respectively. Since the projection 3108c, or the first lock projections 3617b, 3657b and the second lock projections 3618b, 3658b are formed in a disk shape, the first lock projection 3107c and the second lock projection 3108c, or The outer peripheral surfaces of the first lock protrusions 3617b, 3657b and the second lock protrusions 3618b, 3658b are arc-shaped first lock recesses 3117e and 3122d, or first lock recesses 3620e, 3660e and second lock recesses. The first transmitting member 3 slides on the peripheral surfaces of 3629d and 3669d. 07 and the second transmission member 3108, or the first transmission unit 3617,3657 and the second transmission unit 3618,3658 can rotate.

  Then, in this state, the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108, or the first transmission portions 3617, 3657 and the second transmission portions 3618, 3658 are driven by the back upper drive motor 3103 or the back four corner drive motors 3615, 3655. When the is rotated, the first transmission pins 3617a, 3657a and the second transmission pins 3618a, 3658a that revolve are moved in the first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission slit 3122c, or in the first transmission slits 3620d, 3660d, and The first locking projection 3107c and the second locking projection 3108c, or the first locking projections 3617b, 3657b and the second locking projections 3618b, 3658b, which are rotating at the same time as they enter the two transmission slits 3629c, 3669c. Inside the first lock recess 3117e and the second lock recess The first lock recess 3117e and the second lock recess 3122d, or the first lock recesses 3620e, 3660e and the second lock deviate from the inside of the first lock recess 3122e or the inside of the first lock recesses 3620e and 3660e and the inside of the second lock recesses 3629d and 3669d. The first notch portion 3107d and the second notch portion 3108d, or the first notch portions 3617c and 3657c and the second notch portions 3618c and 3658c are located at the positions of the concave portions 3629d and 3669d. The lock of 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122 or the first transmitted member 3620, 3660 and the second transmitted member 3629, 3669 is released, and the state becomes rotatable.

  In this state, the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108, or the first transmission pins 3617a and 3657a that revolve by further rotating the first transmission portions 3617 and 3657 and the second transmission portions 3618 and 3658, and The second transmission pins 3618a and 3658a slide in the first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission slit 3122c, or in the first transmission slits 3620d and 3660d and the second transmission slits 3629c and 3669c and press in the rotation direction. Then, the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122 or the first transmitted members 3620 and 3660 and the second transmitted members 3629 and 3669 rotate. Thereafter, the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108, or the first transmission pins 3617a, 3657a and the second transmission members 3617, 3657 and the second transmission portions 3618, 3658 are further rotated and revolved. At the same time that the transmission pins 3618a and 3658a come out of the first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission slit 3122c, or from the first transmission slits 3620d and 3660d and the second transmission slits 3629c and 3669c, the first lock projection is first performed. The first lock recess 3117e and the second lock recess 3122d into which the portion 3107c and the second lock protrusion 3108c or the first lock protrusions 3617b and 3657b and the second lock protrusions 3618b and 3658b are inserted, or the first lock recess 3122d or the first lock recess 3122d. Lock recesses 3620e, 3660e and second lock recess 3 29d and 3669d are the first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission slit 3122c, or the first lock recess 3117e and the second lock recess opposite to each other across the first transmission slit 3620d and 3660d and the second transmission slit 3629c and 3669c. 3122d, or the first lock recesses 3620e, 3660e and the second lock recesses 3629d, 3669d are the same as the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108, or the first transmission portions 3617, 3657 and the second transmission portions 3618, 3658. It is on the side near the axis connecting the rotation center and the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122 or the first transmitted member 3620, 3660 and the second transmitted member 3629, 3669. Inside the first lock recess 3117e and the second lock recess 3122 The first lock protrusion 3107c and the second lock protrusion 3108c, or the first lock protrusions 3617b, 3657b and the second lock inside the first lock recesses 3620e and 3660e and the second lock recesses 3629d and 3669d. The protrusions 3618b and 3658b enter, and the first lock protrusions 3107c enter the first lock recesses 3117e and the second lock recesses 3122d, or the first lock recesses 3620e and 3660e and the second lock recesses 3629d and 3669d. The second lock projection 3108c or the first lock projections 3617b and 3657b and the second lock projections 3618b and 3658b come into contact with each other.

  That is, the transmission of rotation from the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 or the first transmission portions 3617 and 3657 and the second transmission portions 3618 and 3658 is stopped, and at the same time, the first lock concave portion on the opposite side. The first lock projection 3107c and the second lock projection 3108c into the inside 3117e and the second lock recess 3122d, or into the first lock recesses 3620e and 3660e and the second lock recesses 3629d and 3669d, or the first lock. The first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122, or the first transmitted members 3620, 3660 and the second transmitted member 3629, are brought into contact with the projections 3617b, 3657b and the second locking projections 3618b, 3658b. The rotation of 3669 is stopped (locked).

  Therefore, the first transmitting member 3107 and the second transmitting member 3108, or the first transmitting portions 3617, 3657 and the second transmitting portions 3618, 3658, and the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122, or The first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122, or the first transmitted member 3620, 3660 and the second transmitted member 3629, together with the one transmitted member 3620, 3660 and the second transmitted member 3629, 3669. , 3669 are locked, so that the rotation of the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122 or the first transmitted members 3620, 3660 and the second transmitted members 3629, 3669 is locked. The structure of the pachinko machine 1 is simplified and the increase in cost is suppressed as compared with a case in which a lock mechanism is separately provided. In addition to the above, since a space can be secured by an amount provided separately with the lock mechanism, the back upper decorative body 3152, the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624, 3664, and the back four corner second decorative bodies 3663, 3673 are correspondingly provided. The size can be increased, and the player can be more entertained by the movable effect by the large back decoration 3152 and the like.

  In addition, the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108, or the first transmission portion 3617, 3657 and the second transmission portion 3618, the first cutout portion 3107d and the second cutout portion 3108d of the transmission portion 3618, 3658, or the first transmission portion 3107d The notches 3617c, 3657c and the second notches 3618c, 3658c are connected to the first lock protrusions 3107c and the second lock protrusion 3108c, or the centers of the first lock protrusions 3617b, 3657b and the second lock protrusions 3618b, 3658b. The first lock projection 3107c and the second lock projection 3108c in an equal range on both sides of an axis connecting the (rotation center) and the centers of the first transmission pins 3617a and 3657a and the centers of the second transmission pins 3618a and 3658a. Alternatively, the first lock projections 3617b and 3657b and the second lock projections 3618b and 3658b are cut off. Both, the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122, or the first transmitted member 3620, 3660 and the first transmitted concave portion 3117e and the second transmitted concave portion 3122d of the second transmitted member 3629, 3669, or The first lock recesses 3620e and 3660e and the second lock recesses 3629d and 3669d are formed on both sides of the first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission slit 3122c, or the first transmission slits 3620d and 3660d and the second transmission slits 3629c and 3669c. Therefore, either end of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 or the first transmission portion 3617, 3657 and the second transmission portion 3618, 3658 in the first specific rotation range and the second specific rotation range. The first and second transmitted members 3117 and 31 2 or the rotation of the first transmitted members 3620 and 3660 and the second transmitted members 3629 and 3669 can be locked, and the first transmitted member 3117 and the second transmitted member 3122 or the first transmitted member can be locked. Upper-side drive from the upper-side decorative body 3152 or the upper-side four-corner first decorative bodies 3624, 3664 and the rear-side four-corner second decorative bodies 3633, 3673 via the members 3620, 3660 and the second transmitted members 3629, 3669. The effect of the load on the motor 3103 or the back four corner drive motors 3615 and 3655 can be reduced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game state is changed by hitting a game ball into the game area 5a, the back upper drive motor 3103 of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is changed according to the changed game state. Rotate. When the back upper drive motor 3103 rotates, the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 attached to the unit base 3101 rotate together with the back upper drive motor 3103. When the first transmission member 3107 rotates and enters the first specific rotation range from one end of the first specific rotation range, the rotation of the first transmission member 3107 is transmitted to the first transmitted member 3117. As a result, the first transmitted member 3117 rotates. When the first transmitted member 3117 rotates, the first movable base 3116 extends from the base end, which is one of both ends of the first movable range extending in a direction parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100, to the distal end side. In other words, it slides from the uppermost retracted position to the lower first appearance position. Since the upper decorative body 3152 is attached to the first movable base 3116 via the second movable base 3119, the upper decorative body 3152 moves downward as the first movable base 3116 slides. Becomes Thereafter, the first transmission member 3107 rotates to reach the range end on the opposite side of the first specific rotation range, and at the same time, the first movable base 3116 reaches the tip on the opposite side of the first movable range, that is, the descending end. When the first transmission member 3107 further moves away from the first specific rotation range, the first movable base 3116 stops moving at the lower end. While the first transmission member 3107 is rotating, the second transmission member 3108 is rotating, but since the second transmission member 3108 is not within the second specific rotation range, the second transmission member 3108 is not rotating. Accordingly, the second movable base 3119 is not slid relative to the first movable base 3116.

  A second movable base drive member 3124 to which rotation from the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted is rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116. Since the second movable base driving member 3124 is slidably attached to the rotating link member 3123 in the direction in which the second transmission guide portion 3123d extends (second direction), when the first movable base 3116 slides, The rotating link member 3123 and the second movable base driving member 3124 rotate so that the second direction is parallel to the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, and the second movable base driving member 3124 is moved to the rotating link member 3123. On the other hand, it slides relatively in the second direction. At this time, when the second movable base driving member 3124 rotates, the second movable base 3119 slides with respect to the first movable base 3116 by an amount corresponding to the rotation of the second movable base driving member 3124, and the back upper decorative body 3152 moves. The second movable base 3119 slightly moves in the moving direction. However, when the second direction is parallel to the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, the rotation of the second movable base driving member 3124 stops, and the first movable base 3124 stops rotating. The movement of the back decoration 3152 with respect to the movable base 3116 also stops. Since the moving direction of the second movable base 3119 is the same vertical direction as the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, even if the second movable base 3119 slides slightly by the rotation of the second movable base driving member 3124, The player is not noticed, and the back upper decorative body 3152 can be moved without a sense of incongruity. In the initial state, when the second direction is parallel to the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, the rotation link member 3123 and the second movable base driving member 3124 do not rotate, and the second movable base 3124 does not rotate. 3119 does not slide relatively.

  Subsequently, the rotation of the back upper drive motor 3103 moves the first transmission member 3107 out of the first specific rotation range, further rotates the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108, and causes the second transmission member 3108 to rotate. When entering the second specific rotation range from one end of the second specific rotation range, the rotation of the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted to the second transmission member 3122, and the second transmission member 3122 starts rotating. I do. When the second transmitted member 3122 rotates, the rotation link member 3123 is moved to the second transmitted member 3122 via a portion slidably mounted in the direction in which the first transmission guide portion 3122e extends (first direction). Will revolve around. As the rotary link member 3123 revolves, the extending direction in the second direction is about to rotate. Then, when the direction of the second direction (rotational link member 3123) is about to rotate, the rotation link is set so that the reaction force from the portion where the second movable base driving member 3124 is slidably mounted in the second direction is reduced. While the member 3123 slides along the first direction and the second direction, the second movable base driving member 3124 is rotated, and the rotation from the second transmitting member 3108 is transmitted to the second transmitted member 3122 and the rotation link. It can be transmitted to the second movable base drive member 3124 via the member 3123.

  When the rotation is transmitted to the second movable base driving member 3124, the second movable base 3119 is moved relative to the first movable base 3116 from a base end (upper end) which is one of both ends of the second movable range. It slides in the same downward direction as the moving direction of the first base 3116 toward the opposite end (lower end) side. Accordingly, the upper back decoration 3152 attached to the second movable base 3119 also moves downward together with the second movable base 3119. Thereafter, the second transmission member 3108 rotates to reach the end of the range opposite to the second specific rotation range, and at the same time, the second movable base 3119 moves to the tip (second appearance position) on the opposite side of the second movable range. When the second transmission member 3108 reaches the position and further moves away from the second specific rotation range, the second movable base 3119 stops moving at the tip of the second movable range.

  When the second movable base 3119 slides with respect to the first movable base 3116, the decorative body rotating gear 3120 rotatably attached to the second movable base 3119 is mounted on the rack attached to the first movable base 3116. The member 3115 moves while rotating along the rack gear 3115a. And since the back upper decoration body 3152 is attached to the decoration body rotating gear 3120, when the second movable base 3119 is slid, the back upper decoration body 3152 rotates and moves downward together with the second movable base 3119. Becomes

  In this state, by rotating the back upper drive motor 3103 in the reverse direction, the second movable base 3119 and the first movable base 3116, that is, the back upper decorative body 3152 are moved in the opposite direction to the above, and Can be returned to.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the first movable base 3116 and the second movable base 3119 can be separately moved, a movement of moving the upper back decoration 3152 in two steps is given. This makes it possible to make the back decoration 3152 move in a complicated manner. Also, as the movable effect of the back upper decorative body 3152, by moving only the first movable base 3116, or by moving the second movable base 3119 after the first movable base 3116 is moved, the pattern of the movable effect can be varied. Therefore, the movable effect of the back upper decorative body 3152 can be made hard to get tired, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Also, when the second movable base 3119 is slid, the back upper decorative body 3152 moves downward together with the second movable base 3119 while rotating, so that more various movements can be given to the upper back decorative body 3152. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  Furthermore, the first movable base 3116 and the second movable base 3119 are slid in the same vertical direction, and the back decoration 3152 can be moved a longer distance in the same direction. The impact of the movable performance by 3152 can be increased, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the rotation from the first transmission member 3107 is first transmitted to the first transmission member 3117, and then the first movable base 3116 is moved by the first transmission member 3117. The circumference of the first specific rotation range of the member 3107 can be amplified by the first transmitted member 3117, and the first movable range from the retracted position of the first movable base 3116 to the first appearance position can be made larger. It is possible to entertain the player with the back upper decorative body 3152 that moves greatly, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the back upper decorative body 3152 can be made to move complicatedly by only one back upper drive motor 3103, for example, the first movable base 3116 may be provided with another drive motor for moving the second movable base 3119. The number of drive motors can be reduced as compared to the case where it is possible to reduce the load related to the control of the movable effect, and the first movable base 3116 does not need to include a drive motor. The load (weight) acting on one movable base 3116 can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to provide the first movable base 3116 with a drive motor for the second movable base 3119, it is possible to make the back upper decorative body 3152 larger (heavier) by the weight of the drive motor, which is large. The complicated movement of the back decoration 3152 can increase the impact on the player, and the large back decoration 3152 performs a two-step complicated movement to the player. It can be made to think that there is a good thing, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1500 Central liquid crystal display 2000 Table unit 2001 General winning opening 2002 First starting opening 2003 Gate section 2004 First Second starting opening (variable winning opening)
2005 Lower winning prize (variable prize)
2006 Upper winning prize entrance 2300 Attacker unit 2500 Center accessory 2510 Center base 2511 Flange 2512 Front peripheral wall 2513 Rear peripheral wall 2540 Upper right entrance (entrance, smoother)
2541 Upper gaming space (distribution space)
2541a Guide (transfer, smoother)
2541b Exit 2542 Right passage 2543 Lower right exit

Claims (2)

A gaming machine comprising an outer frame and a main body frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, wherein a game is played using a game medium,
The outer frame is
A lower member that is provided at a lower portion and includes a curtain plate on which the main body frame is placed in a state where the main body frame is closed with respect to an outer frame;
A hinge member provided on the left side of the outer frame and supporting the main body frame so as to be openable and closable,
At least
A first standing wall portion that is provided horizontally at a position retracted rearward from a front end of the outer frame on a side where the hinge member is provided ;
A second standing wall portion which is provided on the upper side of the curtain plate at a position on the right side and the front side of the first standing wall portion so as to prevent foreign matter from entering from the front of the gaming machine;
A game ball discharge area formed before the first standing wall portion and behind the front end of the outer frame, and for discharging game balls to the rear side of the curtain ;
With
The upper end of the first standing wall portion is higher than the upper end of the second standing wall portion ,
The game ball discharge area is formed with a width smaller than a lateral width of the hinge member,
The first standing wall portion is capable of receiving a game ball rolling rearward on the hinge member in a state where the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame, and is in contact with the first standing wall portion. While being configured to be able to guide the game ball to the game ball discharge area,
The first standing wall portion, a game machine, characterized in that located the person after Ri by the body frame lower end rear surface when the body frame is closed. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first standing wall portion has a bent portion that is bent in the front-rear direction in the middle of the horizontal direction.

Images